Arabic Grammar
METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER. ARABIC GRAMMAR OF THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE REV. G. W. THATCHER, M. A., A. D. WARDEN OF CAMDEN
Views 206 Downloads 2 File size 32MB
Recommend stories
- Author / Uploaded
- Kollektor
Citation preview
METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.
ARABIC
GRAMMAR
OF THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE
REV. G. W. THATCHER, M. A., A. D. WARDEN OF CAMDEN COLLEGE. SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA. FORMERLY SENIOR TUTOR, MANSFIELD COLLEGE, OXFORD. SECOND EDITION.
LONDON. NUTT
OAVI
DULAU &
(A. O. Berry), 818 Shaftcebury Avenue, W. C. 2. CO., U4 36 Margaret Street, Cavendish Square Wl.
5EW YOBK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street. THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street. G E. 8TECHERT & CO., 161166 West 26th Street. E. 6TEIGER & CO., 49 Murray Street. BOSTON:
G.
REUSCHEL,
110 Tremont Street 128 Tremont Street,
8CHOENHOF BOOK COMPANY,
HEIDELBERG. JULIUS GROOS. 1922.
The Gasper- Otto -Saner Method has become sole property by These books are continually revised. All rights, right of purchase. especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, are reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Suitable
my
communications always thankfully received
Juliu
Heidelberg.
B
-.
.
j]
Ill
Preface. During the last ten years of my teaching of Arabic have often found that my pupils had received much 1 and have been help from Harder's Arabic Grammar I
,
asked
When
whether there was a similar work in English. I was asked by the firm of Julius Groos to write
such a work using Harder to any consented,
many
and
trust this
students of Arabic,
The
present work
has been and
is
is
written.
extent,
I
gladly
Grammar may be useful to who cannot read German. a grammar of Arabic as it The spoken language varies
Egypt, Syria, Morocco etc. but the written language is the same for all; the chief difference between the modern and ancient literature consisting in Arabia,
new words to meet the requirements of advanced knowledge. , Each lesson should be thoroughly mastered before
in the introduction of
the next
is
studied.
Each
exercise should be carefully
worked and compared with the key. In the supplement only a few extracts from older books are given, as the Koran and other works of this class
can easily be obtained.
Special attention
on the other hand to selection from modern journals and correspondence.
To classical
is
given
novels,
who wish to study the grammar of the Arabic further I would recommend the last
those
1 Arabische Konversations-Grammatik mit beeonderer BerQcksichtigung der Schriftaprache von Ernst Harder. Heidelberg, Julius GrooB, 1898.
2G11C
IV
Preface.
edition of Wright's Arabic Grammar published Cambridge University Press.
The various
styles of Arabic
handwriting
by the niaj"
be
studied in the Specimens d'ecritures Arabes (with key) published at the Imprimerie Catholique in Beyrouth.
A handy guide to Arabic literature "Arabic Literature" London 1903. Sydney (New
is
M.
C. Stuart's
South Wales), September 1910.
G.
W.
Thatcher.
Table of Contents. Pages
m
Preface
*
Introduction
Alphabet Vowels 5.
Madda
1.
Pronunciation
Nunation
13.
7.
Syllable
Abbreviations
4.
Sukfln
Classification of Letters 4.
Tashdld
8.
Accent
14.
15.
8.
Hamza
Numerals
9.
15.
16.
17
Exercises in reading
First Part. Lesson
*
Article
2.
Feminine.
3.
Number
4.
6.
Broken Plural Broken Plural
6.
Declension.
7.
Genitive (continued)
44
8.
Pronominal Suffixes
49
9.
Demonstrative Pronouns
53
10. >
23
1.
11.
25
Collectives
29 33
.
36
40
Genitive
Adjectives
57
Verb
61
12.
Verb with
13.
Imperfect
71
14.
Moods
76
67
suffixes
of Imperfect
80
15.
Jussive
16.
Imperative.
Present Participle. G
=.
17.
Passive.
Particles
,..t
,
2
,..t
Verbal Noun
.
84
s c
and
,.,i
-
89
Table of Contents.
VI
Pages
Lesson 18. 19.
Derived Forms of Verb
Forms
20.
V. and VI.
21.
VII.
22.
IX. and X. Forms
28.
Classification of Verbs.
24.
Hamzated Verbs
25.
Hamzated Verbs
26.
Weak Weak Weak
27.
28.
29. 80.
94
.100
and IV. Forms
II. III.
Vm.
and
107
Forms
Ill
116
Doubled Verbs
...
121
129 136
....
Verbs.
A. Assimilated verbs
Verbs.
B. Hollow verbs
151
Verbs.
C. Defective verbs
167
Doubly Weak Verbs Verbs of wonder. Optative.
143
184
Quadriliteral Verbs.
The verbs
o
,
plo
,
Ji
,
j Jo
,
yX
and
its sisters
.
.
193
202
81.
Relative sentences
32.
Numerals.
33.
Numerals (Ordinals)
Dates.
210
Age
225
Second Part. Lesson 34.
Noun
233
35.
Nouns of Place and Time, Instrument, Dimi-
36.
Relative Adjective.
37.
38.
Proper names Feminine
39.
Number.
nutive
.
.
.
.
,
.
249 251
Broken Plurals
40.
Broken Plurals (continued)
41.
Declension of
42.
Use of Cases.
43.
Pronouns
240 244
Adjectives
256 268
Noun Emphasis.
274 Permutative
.
.
278 287
44.
Prepositions
45.
Adverbs
.
.
290
.
305
Table of Contents.
VII Pages
Lesson 46. 47.
Conjunctions Conditional sentences
48.
Interjections
48.
Arabic Verse
.
.
313 321
327 332 345
Supplement Arabic-Engllsh Vocabulary
381
English-Arablc Vocabulary
437
Arabic Index
449
English Index
.
460
Introduction Arabic characters are written from right to
The alphabet (sLs^
(op-
harf, plur.
hija)
consists
O
s> huruf), 3j
sonants.
Most of these
different
forms
letters
according
to
which
left.
of 28 characters
represent conare written in slightly all
whether they
1.
stand
are joined to a preceding letter or 3. are joined to a preceding and a following letter or 4. are joined to a following letter only.
alone or
2.
Arabic Grammar.
Introduction.
Note is
The
1.
used merely
ditions (see
a)-
10).
letter'
as a
or b)
I
(altf)
has no sound of
its
own but
support for hamza under certain conto lengthen a preceding a vowel (see 6)
Introduction.
or
c)
end Of 8^
at the
of verbs
plur.
(see
consonant of the Arabic alphabet
first real
Note
When
2.
of nouns or adjectives , JO5J is called K&*j v'j
tft
Note
4).
3 and
The 10).
used as the feminine ending written as ha () with two dots (s) and
the letter it i
is
tft
marbuta, the ordinary
tft
This
tawlla.
6,
* (see
if
tft
tft
being called
of the feminine ending
not pro-
is
nounced in modern Arabic except when followed by a word beginning with a vowel sound. The modern usage is observed 9-0-.
book
in the technical terms of this
hamza
e.g.
for
OJT;
hamzat
al-wasl for
Note
8.
Note
4.
In
NW.
Africa f
The following
y=
foreign words:
ch
T
p;
^ and q
written
is
are
letters (as
in
v_j.
sometimes used in
church),
huruf
alhija')
letters of the
into
a)
those
Introduction.
* -
which
dotted
are
j.>
)
hurnf rau'jauaa) and
^j>
(iU^-
.
b)
which
those
are
not
dotted
(VdUg*
huraf
o^y>
muhmala). 2.
letters
,
^>
More
,
^
letters
division
5
AA
> 1
L>"> vA uf, o*, of the Article, and b)
into
a)
Sun
The
which
v5,
Moon
letters
alhuruf alqamariya), comprising the other
which do not assimilate the
the alphabet,
Lesson 3.
j,
the
o^2
letters of
(see
the
(iu,*Ajf cA>j3| alhuruf ashsharaslya) namely
assimilate fciytJuT
is
practical
1
I).
letters,
(LJ?
I
v-4js>
aljf,
^ wa\
hurQf
and'^ jj
al'illa)
are called
Weak
because they arc often
interchanged or dropped under the influence of other letters. Contrasted with these, the other letters of the alphabet are called Sound assahlha).
letters
(s^Waj
3
alhuruf
..
5.
Vowels.
Every consonant in a vocalised Arabic text is r provided ^ith a vowel sign or with a sign indicating the absence of a vowel.
The vowel i shukttl) 1.
sonant
signs (jXfe shaki, Plur. 3lXa! ashkal or
are three in
iLste fatha,
number:
a small diagonal stroke over a con-
=
a as in o da. 0,0, *f*S kasra a scroll diagonal stroke under a consonant = i as in o di. 2.
?.
&*/>
damma, a small
u as in o du.
3 above a consonant
=
Introduction.
6
The
sign indicating the absence of a vowel
It written above^a consonant. 6 -> i kun. or iJojs. jazma e.g.
called
is
is
-^
a yL* sukan
^
Note L
The
vowel signs above do not 'actnally the vowel sounds used in pronunciation for while it inclines to fatha preserves the & sound after ., -i, ,
represent
three
ail
g,
the sound of au in "taught" after the Emphatic letters yo, (_p, _b ? ^0, *, and is usually thinned down to the sound of S after G i or S^_^> tauratun "Torah"
(the
Mosaic Law).
Note
4.
An
I
written bat not pronounced after the
is
> *
with which some verbal forms end o
$
*
\^J==> katabu "they
e.g.
. -
wrote" \^>j ramau "they threw". The e in the word iuU mi'atun "hundred".
\
Is
also not pronounced
7.
Nunation.
At the end of nouns and adjectives, when indefinite, the three vowel signs are sometimes written double, ,thus
sign
JL,
_
This
is
fot
an
baban, aLif
_L and
,
are then
the so-called Nunation ,(
has
i
as
it
well,
cw
except
tanwln). after
B
an,
in,
The
e.g.
LL
khaltfatan.
When however an find
ronounced tw,
written
^JL
as
is
a contraction
^jsi hudan
(for
for
oyu
hudayun);
we *&.
Introduction
8
n contraction for
awun
is
it
or
written ^5
!_L as
c
J^tf.
uae^asan
or
(for
asa\vun). 8.
Sukun or Jazma. of a vowel after a consonant isjndi9-o , O cated by the sign __ called o yC* sukun or Xxp. jazma
The absence
e.g.
JJ3 qatlun "a killing", \&lzS katabat "she wrote".
letters ^ and ^5 take sukun when they form diphthongs, but not when they only lengthen__vowels
The
(see
6).
For the omission of sukun with the article see
lain of the
9.
o
A
vowelless consonant
"resting"
(
5,
note
is
said
to
be
sakin
^jfl**
2).
9.
Tashdld.
When a consonant occurs twice without a vowel sound between, it is written once only qnd the sign (called vXisX-iJ tashdld) is placed
over
it
e.g.
J
S-
marra "he passed by", ^U marrun "passing by". The consonantal sound however must be distinctly pronounced twice. Tashdld often indicates assimilation.
Thus the ^
when
the word to
of the Article 3! al
which
it is
The
is
(3
is
assimilated
prefixed begins with a Sun letter (see retained in writing but without sukun;
4). ajgtd^
Go* tashdld
is
written
over the following letter J
shamsun "sun" becomes with the shamsu "the sun";
Jo^
arrajulu "the man".
rajulun
Article
"a
J-^K
e.g. o
5
^^J-iJ! ash-
man" becomea.
9
Introduction. *
Again the
and la
^
c
of the words
"from what",
min
of assimilated to the J and ^
is
^
U ma "what" and
= an-la,
^
*an "that",
\
}
an "from"
"not",
^1 alia
o
"that not",
^
in
U* minima and
L*i 'aramfi
amman
"from him
^I^mimman and
=
"who, whom"
man
e
f.
. {
y4
who": so also ttt Sometimes the letters o, cy, o, o, , JP," J& are assimilated to a following o. Here also the letter assimilated is left in the writing but without sukun, while a tashdld is written over the 'ilia
o
e.g.
co'.t aratta ^
'in-la "if not".
= arad-tA, d^ labittu = labith-tu. :
,
10.
Hamza.
Hamza
_JL.
(jl o
two kinds
>-
.,0,0
,h>^t
1.
be dropped and is
cf.
1,
hamzat
SJ^P
2.
Note
1
and
3) -is
of
o
aJ.P
Juo^J!
alqat",
hamzat
omitted under some circumstances
which cannot alwasl,
(see
which
11).
above (with JL- and _L) or one of the letters I, ^ but sometimes
It is generally written
under (with
_
)
^
independently. The following are the rules for writing it: I. At the beginning of a word it is always written O,o 9o Oo with amrun, a.^? ibratun, ..o5 'udhnun. e.g. i
II. a)
jA\
In the middle of a word: Preceded by _1_ a and i. followed by _I_ a or O
*
sukun 2.
it is
followed
ya'isa;
3.
written above
by
_
followed
ba'usa.
it
by
is
I
e.g.
JL.
written
_i_ u
it
is
sa'ala,
above
^
uw ?j ra'sun;
^
e.g.
written above 3 e.g.
Introduction.
10
_
Preceded by
above
^
i
it
is
written
Preceded by _i_ u
it
is
written above ^ followed by
b)
e.g.
Go
^
biruu. c)
followed by a or u, above
JL
yu'allifu,
^L
followed by
it
vowel,
bearer
hamza
If
e)
is
e.g.
^ joins the ^ III.
e.g.
b) After
when
^
J^ yab'usu.
t
maqru'atun;
if
preceded
written above the stroke that ;
k.L khatl'atun.
not affected by the vowel that follows it, afler _L over after over ^5 \j*
the
,
it
tjfij
yaqra'u, ^jo danu'a,
has no bearer
e.g.
3^> dau'un,
With the ending an the hamza
stroke
CLi
\
qara'a,
sukun
shai'un.
9^yi over
little
it is
I,
I
At the end of a word:
_
after
e.g.
or 3 of the long above the line without any
tasa'ala, fr^yu
written over
is
written above
to the following letter e.g. x
a) It is
but
when i,
followed by u, over
preceded by
written a
i3U4
is
ilLl yas'alu,
e.g., is
of long
by the
it
when
followed by _!., over 3
when
when
su'ila.
Preceded by sukun
d)
^
connecting the previous
is
written
letter
with
however the preceding letter shai'an; e.g. cannot be connected the is omitted and the hamza the
t
if
I
written without bearer e.g.
Hamzat
g>
juz'an.
alwaal.
fo some cay* the hamza at the beginning of, a word is no essential part of its form t but seems to 1.
11
Introduction.
to prevent a syllable from beginning with a vowel., In such cases, when it follows another word, the hamzals dropped with its vowel, a sign called*
b^written only
0- o
-
is put in place of the hamza and the two words are read as one. If the preceding word does not end in a vowel, jhen one is given to it in accordaoce with the rules below (4). TheHainza in these
wasja
cases
(iJLoj)
called Joo^I
is
reserved in_tbe
hamzat alwagl
aj+3>
writing,
The
oo^ abdu
^Jlill
sarafa (from vJ^oj^), 2.
The hamza
a)
In the Article
though
noljjronoanced. neither on Ihe'pron^anciatioiL e
Examples:
t,
is
^31
^
^yajlj wa'n-
'Iqadiri;
4otJ
ra'aitu 'bna 'lamiri.
harnzat alwagl:
is
f
3l al e.g.
abdu ^oUJ I Jvxc
'Iqadiri.
b) In the Imperative of the I form of the^Verb^
(Lesson 16)
e.g. vlutf?
viis qultu 'ktub "I said: write".
and Verbal noun of foimsoflhTYerb, (Less. 1 8)
c) IiX-ibe Perfect, Imperative
HLlYinnX e.g.
^i\a
and
X
fa'nhazama.
d) In the following eight words:
GO iyi\
6
^^ ^\ j^
preceded by the Pre-
"to
lirrajuli
Similarly from 2jf allah "to God". d)
if
al,
befflns^with
out also e.g.-iXjJ
e.g.
the son of Amr".
is
j^
lilwaladi "to .the boy",
preserved
or the strengthening Particle S
for")
ji_ "to,
is
{
!
Jl
lillahi
drop out, when
e.g.
5^Lt
abnuka
5Uln) "thy son"? 12.
Madda. If_a_ tEJBn"
bamza with fatha (a) is followed by a^ vowelless the hamza and vowel are dropped and one is
written, while
madda horizontally above)
above
(really
which
is
this is written a sign
the second alif written
pronounced
a,
e.g.
cr,T
14
Introduction,
aminun
(for
cr !!),
^
!
(for allj) ra'ahu,
o lyj
qur'anun
(for *,
Note.
In
"
is
vowel, e.g.
t\jP
many books
the usual
provided with this sign,
t
which lengthens the
when
it
precedes hamza
sahrfi'u "desert".
13.
The
Syllable.
1.
There are two kinds of
a)
Open, consisting of a consonant and a short
vowel
e.g.
b)
syllable.:
JJtf ka-ta-ba..
Closed, consisting of a consonant, short vowel nd and 3 rd e.g. the 2 syllables
and vowelless consonant ka-tab-tum.
Syllables consisting of a consonant and a long considered closed since the letters ~t\' Vs
vowel aje
are considered vowelless consonants e.g.
^b
da-ri.
A consonant followed Jjythe nunation is also considered as closed (as if the n were written) e.g. ;
!o
If
da-run. 2. No syllable can begin with a vowelless consonant. suclTa case arises from inflection in Arabic words,
a hamzat alwa?l with "write" (for >^jS ktub).
unchangeable hamza
e.g.
.
prefixed e.g.
Cof
I
'uktub
In writing foreign words an
(jJaiSf S}!P)
aflatQnu "Plato", or the
a vowel
is
{
first
faransa lljji
is
prefixed e.g. J,>bii!
consonant
(for fraiisa)
is
provided with
"France".
Introduction.
No
3.
sonants.
one (cf.
15
can close with two vowelless consuch a case arises from inflection, then
syllable
If
letter falls
also
6,
out
Note
j^S qnl becomes
e.g.
and
12
The only exception words in which these vowel are followed
qfll
"say",
this rule is in the case of
letters
-
I,
^
3,
lengthening a
by a doubled consonant
from
farrun, for
to
Jjj
11, 3).
e.g. Jli
farirun.
14.
Accent.
is
1. In words of more than one syllable the accent never on the last.
the last syllable but one i3_closed,
2. If
the accent
e.g. jls
q&la,
x-M ijtamd'na, 1/6 3.
Syb .yaqulu, *6*\
it
receives.
^Jo^> khayyatuna,
akhbarn&kum.
In words of three syllables,
if
the last but one
open, the accent falls on the last but two e.g. kataba. In words of four or more syllables the acce.nl is__carried back until it meets with a closed sllabi is
- - o . '
V.J&A inashwaratun, uUx^ tajannabata, mukatabatun. 1
e.g.
15.
Numerals.
In former times (and occasionally still in some forms of literature) the letters of the alphabet areused to indicate numerals. In this case the order 1.
artificial
of the 1 Dtters is that of the old Semitic alphabet, followed by the letters peculiar to the Arabic alphabet. This
alphabet
is
called
JsJ^T o^Js> huruf
al'abjad.
16
Introduction.
1.1 o
2. 3.
d
200.
30.
J
300.
40.
s o
4.
20.
500.
60.
5. 6.
L
70.
5
9.
Js
^ uX^?
800.
1000.
^
given in the following h'ne:
is
-
o
700.
o
100.
This order
600.
.
^
80.
7.
10.
400.
r
50.
c
^
1 \>
j^*iii'W
but that used in
,
NW.
The numerals
2.
t
i*
r
Africa differs slightly from this.
now
in general use
f
o
v
i
A
1
are:
.
34567890
12
These are read from
left to
right e.g. uiv 1897.
16.
Abbreviations.
A
stroke resembling a
madda
is
generally (though
not always) put above abbreviations e ila
akbirihi
The the
"and so
!
salla
forth" (literally "to
following abbreviations are in
names of llahu
certain persons
f
alaihi
him peace" used
g.
:
,**o
^Jl for s->7 its
end").
common
=
J.I
use after
JLLj ^IIr
^
&
!
jjo
wasallama "God bless him and give
after the c
Jtc
name
of
Mohammed.
alaihi 'ssalamu
"Upon him be
peace" used after the names of other prophets.
Introduction.
"May God
radiya 'llahu 'anlrn
be pleased with him" used Companions of Mohammed.
j
=
>
i
-e
after
names
the
of the
.
dJ!
rahimahu
*s>j
compassion on him" used
"May God have
'llahu
names of the dead.
after the
Exercises in reading. I.
^
vlj*
J?
JLi
tib
kul
qum
JJ
ft
vLi*
j
qul bal abun
harnun
yadun kai dum
jj
uam dhu khudh
wa
'an
J
o o
l!
ta
lam ma
bi
la sir
a.
g,
kullun dalla tibbun
madda lubbun wai
II.
farahun qatlun shariba hasuna fariha qatala kataba O 06-. -Go, G,, Oo,
ibilun O H,
.
4a r un
habluu o
ra'sun khifti
,
t,i
khafa Go-
t^la
G
-
husnun G o,
qumta mautun jarun baitun
hasanun
G
fllun
G
>
uurun
jara akala bikrin nahrin baLirin bukblun zahrin Arabic Grammar,
2
Introduction.
18
m.
6
s
VJ,^
o..
w~AJ
-o.
6-
LjJS
WOK
Q
haribun nafsan qulna katibun kitabun katabtu katabat
katabtum asasun
uj^Xo
aqtulu tadribu jaktubu
fattish fattasha
w^T
f&it
, .o, l-^^ u-aXxir' 0^-7*" f^Jj^ C)^*" ^^^ J
>
(
'
1
takhtalifu
tarlqukum ta'banu saratanun jalisan miftahun
^,l5J
^^>1
li3^iJ.[
tadanika
ihmarrat
ittakhadhtuaa
Lulx.>^
o 3 } j when the word to which
is
is
^ it
ji is
'arrajulu
,j4-ls1
o s
man" ^.^-Ji ashshamsu
words the j
e.g.
bab-
assimilated
is
o o
attached begins with one of these 'the
ou
'
In pronunciation the J of the article 4, 2)
e.g.
vi>Jjf vjb
;
house"; vti**J!
(accus.) of the house".
to the Sun-letters (Intro. (jo
word
preceding
babulbaiti "the door of the house"
"the
In such
sun".
written without vowel-sign
and tashdid
placed over the Sun-letter. 4.
.Adjectives as qualify.
nouns they adjective
must have
attributes If the it
arldun u a wide river"; "the wide river".
also
are
placed
noun has the e.g.
^jojjt
after
the
article
th^
jfS
nahrun
c
t
oj T*jI lull
'annahruraridu
24
First Part.
5.
The_CQpula O
Arabic^ is
e.g.
"is" or "are"
is
not expressed in
Joss
*
\ja&f. jju]
'annahru 'artdun
"the river
wide". 6.
The personal pronouns 3
Gf
ana
of the singular are:
I.
'anta
Thou
saJt 'anti
Thou
ooi
'^s>
g
(masc.). (fern.).
huwa He. hiya She.
Vocabulary.
O
bahrun a
bustiinun a garden.
insanun a man.
sea.
j /qablhun :
{
graceful.
bad, dis-
25
Second Lesson. Exercise j
1.
G
>o
o
..
bUJ
^ojoS LX**J
J
-
^-^
I
1
G.,j ,s
G
-
8--
-
^^s- J^-Ji G
G
G
-
^- v^I,
-
-oS
J^
UU5
. >
>
y
,
*
O
O
JG-:,
-
j ,
O
-
-
-
t. '
>
t,
>*t.
v^ j^l
lit
J^>,
-
a
tf E
Transcription.
albustanu kablrun.
albustanu
al-
arrajulu hamaliarmllu nahruu.
insanun qablhun.
sanun.
'Ikablru.
mahallun hasanun.
baitu '^saghlru.
kun 'adilun. albahru kablrun. qasrunkuwaiyisun. khubzun taiyibun. alkhubzu taiyibun ani rajulun. huwa auta ta'banu. alqadl rajulun taiyibun. hablbun taiyibun. arrajulu huwa 'lhablbu 'ssadiqu. shshri'u 'ari^un. Exercise
2.
The house is large. The garden is a Thou art a good man. - - I am place.
The
beautiful castle
judge
is
art a
bad man.
and I
upright.
(^
wa) the wide
am an
The wide
beautiful tired.
river.
upright friend.
The Thou
street.
Second Lesson.
The Feminine. 1.
(for
Most feminine words take the ending
this
form of
t
see
Intro.
1,
Note
2),
_!_
e.g.
atun
^t
26
First Part.
O-o
"a
'ibrum
xut
son",
"a
'ibnatun
daughter";
kablran "great", feminine a-y^ kablratun.
The
2.
or
qualifies
adjective is
predicate
'Ikablratu "the big girl",
"the
girl is
to.
'LJ3\ iSif 'alibnatu
e.g.
{^
it
2ll .'alibnatu kablratun
big (or old)".
Some words
3.
with the noun which
agrees
are
feminine without
having_a
femimne"'ending.;
Nouns denoting females
a)
e.g.
O i,
mother", u^f. of a woman).
Proper names of lands and
b)
'urnmun
^5
JUP Hindun (name cities e.g.
(without nunation) "Egypt, Cairo", ^UJ! (always with article), "Syria, Damascus". c)
Names
pairs
._vc (
Jvj
O
e.g.
'ainun "eye"
Many
d)
yadun
"hand",
yax misru 'ashshamu
body which occur
of those parts of the ,
in
"a
o
'arusun "a bride",
o
Jo^
rijlun
"foot",
etc.
single
words,
among
the
commonest
being: O o (joi
O o *M-&
'ardun, earth.
shamsun, sun.
..
khamrun, wine.
.'j
namn,
fire.
O o,
,
tjarun, house. [
>
^V-AJ
G
>^
nh\ln, wind.
Note
1.
Some words
v^. are
nafsun,
self,
soul.
-*
siiqun, market.
used both
as masculine
and
feminine, (see Less. 38).
Note a'cr (see
2.
Other feminine endings are ^5 -- a and
Leas. 38).
*!
Second Lesson.
Note culine
Nouns ending
3.
K.JL>
e.g.
27
denoting males are mas-
in
khallfatun "a caliph",
^syb Tarafatu
(the
name
of a poet).
Collectives,
Many words
4.
singular in form have a collective 6
G--
meaning
e.g.
To
"olives". O
*""
^
Q ___
JL ending
is
_atun
to
appended
such words 5^
hajaratun "a piece of rock, a stone", "a (single) olive". 5.
JO-
hajarun "rock", o >jj zaitunun indicate a single object the feminine
Tnterrogat^yft
particles $J> or
s^
J^u; zaitunatun
apntyncea are introduced by the
The
f.
e.g.
j O->
latter
is
prefixed
to. the
first
word of the sentence. Vocabulary. -
"
Maddun \
Ihadirun present,
a grand-
father.
('ready.
a grand-
(jaddatun mother
9 j
f
salihun honest.
^*i
junainatun a garden.
na
am
aklmun
fqadlmun
2
muzillun shady.
old, ancient
(of things).
9
Jk hadimun i
.
*
ft
( man, f*^ physician. J& JL> tairuu a bird.
es.
UM sa'atun an hour.
\
strong,
violent.
.jLuLs>-
s hadidun
a man,
servant.
jadldun new.
(khadimatunamaid,
waladun
a boy.
I
servant.
28
First Part.
rauti'un obedient
malikatun a queen.
qahirun conquering.
(gharibun setting (of the sun).
nazifun clean.
(tuffahun apple
jiwazzun goose (
(
Jshajarun tree
maiyitun dead.
j
Exercise
name
(a
(collective).
(collective).
(collective).
3.
of Cairo)
jB
j3 jii
Transcription.
aljaddu kablrun.
alibaljaddatu kablratun. hali 'ijuuaiuatu salifrun. na atni 'ljunainatu kuwaiyisatun. kuwaij'isatun. sa atun hasanatun. addaru jadlalbaitu qadltnun. datun. 'arummu hasanatun. alwaladu hadirun. rlhun shadldatun. arrihu shadldatun. a'anta c ta'banu. na'ara aoa ta banu: hal anta 'Iqadi.
natu 'aghlratu.
ibnun c
c
-
20
Third Lesson.
alihatun. la hiya hal hiya ana 'lhaklmu. ashshamsu t&li'atuu. ashshajaratu alkhadimatu mutfatun. 'Imuzillatu. mi?ru 'Iqaal'iwazzu t^irun. hiratu. alyadu nazlfatun. la
qablhatun.
aFiwazzatu
'Iraaiyitatu.
Exercise
The mother
is
4.
A
present.
No, the garden
garden lerge? house is small.
The wind
is
great fire. small.
Is the
is
The new
violent.
Art thou
the grandmother? Yes, I am the grandmother. - The beautiful The king is just and daughter. The setting sun. the queen is beautiful.
(fern.)
*
,-*+
Third Lesson.
9 "
Number. 1.
There are three numbers in Arabic: Singular
Dua|
(Oji* rnufrad),
muthauna
()j&*
or &AJ&J tathniya)
9.o *
and Plural (** 2.
^either
jam*).
The Dual masc. or
formed by adding to the wor4
is
fern.)
the tennination
o
aini for the other
ani for the
t
cases,,,
e.g.
malikun a king; malikani two kings glb> (noni.); o^
^IXL* " /
3JX*
queens
In
added.
two kings (other , ,
malikatun
(noni.)
Note. suffix is
raalikaini
a
^IHJU the
fern,
cases).
,
queen ,-,oXU malikatani two malikataini
the
a
is
two queens (other
changed to
o
whenever a
30
First Part.
3.
The
a)
The Sound
Plural
of two kinds:
is
formed by the addition of endings
to the singular.
(^u j-l
plural
word and in some cases with au ending Lessons 4 and 5).
The Sound
4.
plural masc. of
js_formed by adding ^3-
and ^j
_ ma
assalim)
'aljain
r
?
The Broken
b)
c
5^!
plural (jJl^Jl
aljam
as well.
nouns and
jana
the
for
almu-
for the other cases^ after the
adjectives.
nominative case-ending
pf the nominative singular has been dropped, e.g. Plural Nona.
Singular.
other cases.
Plural,
r*^
malikuna.
8
nialiklna:
'
kathlrun.
kathlruna.
The .Sound jglural JBg ot
_
-
of feminines ~~ ~
~,
ot_L
atun into
jitun for
the other cases,
J.tin for
>.
kathlrln'a.
formed by chang-
is
the nominative and
e.g.
Plural Norn.,
Singular. G,
'-'
^
khadimatun a maid-servant. OU^'L> khadimatun. Plural, other cases.
khadimatin. Note. 6,
Some feminine nouns
take a masculine sound plural, t
-
eg. ioLw sanatun
a year Plur. ...^-Lw sinlina; some masculine
nouns also take a feminine sound o
,
--
plural, e.g. ,;,!_***-
hayawanun
-
animal, Plur. Ou!_j-o> hayawanatun. 5.
gender
Adjectives agree with their nouns not only in "'(see
LTess.
2,
2)
but^alsojn niugoer^excepT
Third Lesson.
31
,-
when
the noun is injhe* Sound fern, plur.tbe. usually in the femT singular, though Tt'ig in thjB fern, plur. when persons are indicatedT ocrflgionftlly ^
ttdjective la
5)
Broken
'plurals being originally^Collectives, take, the.
jjdjectjreJn_JJie_fem.
sinft.
(see
Lessons 4 and
5).
Examples of the regular agreement: Ikhadimun hasanun a good |
-
:
.
-
^ L> -
-
fui)
(beauti-
servant,
fkhadimatun hasanatun a good maid\
servant.
Ikhadimani hasanani two good serIkhadimatani hasanatani two good I
maid-servants.
^is>- ^^-olA- khfidimuna hasanuua good servants.
Example
of exception a): :
(khadimatuu hasanatun good maid8ervauts>
or as the l>L*M^>
G.
noun
indicates persons
o'wcJL> khadimatun hasanatun.
The personal pronouns
^ -
,
huwa
he.
>
are:
Ihuma they two
>
^
(hum they masc..
hiya she. junta
thou
(masc.).
antuma ?
-.^f
(
7. y, (masc. and
rn..
5
fantum you
, |
antunna vou
em ^
.:*
(ana I (masc.
and
fern.
^
a^'
jnahnu !
I
we
(masc. and
fern..
First Part.
Exercise 5.
6,
Fourth Lesson.
33
Transcription,
alrnu'alliinu 'sgalihu. c al ainam 'llami'atani.
almu'allimnua salihflna. almu'allimetu hadiratun.
antum mabsutuna.
hal
lailatani
wanaharani.
la
nahnu
za'lanuna. na'ani
hali 'Iqadl inashghfllun.
alkhabbazuna mujtahidtina. huwa mashghulun. alibnatani gha'ibatani. alkhaiyatu wa'lkbaiyatatu inashghulani. alkhaiyatttna wa'lkhaijatatu muytahidana. almuslimtlna 'salihuna. waladani la'ibSni. alharatu nazifatun. Exercise
6.
clean. The teachers are present. Are you (two) inflashing eye. Are you vexed? dustrious? Yes, we are busy. The Moslem is pious. No, I am contented. They The beautiful tailoresses are (raasc.) are absent. The is industrious. The boy night is present. dark. The servants and maid servants are tired.
The quarter
(of the
A
is
town)
is busy. Two busy physicians. clean hands. Are the bakers idle? Yea, the carpenters are idle, they are tired.
The physician
Two and
Fourth Lesson.
The Broken
Plural.
Arabic words with few exceptions Explanation. (see Note) consist of three consonants called Radicals together with certain vowels and sometimes prefixes or To indicate patterns or type-forms of words suffix^. Arabian grammarians use the three consonants Jja the
o
representing the
and the ^ the to
third e.g.
be of the form
Go
first
G
radical,
olf
the
^
the second
kalbun "a dog"
is
9,2
said
S o*
O
Juts;
.^S of the form Juoe; Ji> (for
o
} ,
.>
c'f
of the form Jjii; *y\ 'ahmaru "red" of the form T : ;
^Ji
of the form
Arabic Grammar.
^^Ufc
J?^1U
of the form
,
8
34
First Part.
A
Note.
JJUs
few Arabic words have four radicals; The pattern
used for them.
is
There are 31 patterns of tbe^Brokeg,PJiiral (Less. 3, A complete list of theslTTs given in Lessons 39 and 40. Among the most frequently used are? 3).
.
t
I
3lJf
a)
ffr\ '
Q
"a
boy '*
....
'auladun plur. of jjj waladun
;
(j*5js!
o
'afrasun plur. of
,.
of
UujZ
same way are formed the
the
farasun "a horse";
^j -
'ashrafun plur.
J-af >
i1
e.g. ^5,5
1
sharffun
"noble".
In
plurals of J*ib tfflun "a
Go, baby"; ^lax matarun "rain"; .^i^ waqtun "time".
3ji
b)
e.g.
;
'usuduu
_^
buhurun
plur. of
jJJ
plur. of o
^ bahrun
'asadun
"a
lion";
o
.*
shuhndun
"sea";
j^Ui shahidun "a witness";
plur. of
o ^*
of/j^>haqqun "a
fyuqtlqun plur.
way G
4
O
In the same
are formed the plurals of JJbs qalbun "a heart"; 6
t,,
j^i> jundun "an army"; G
^
right".
JLS
c)
G
.
-
5JU malikun "a king". G c-
,
kilabun plur. of ^JLT kaibun "a
e.g. vjtki'
dog"; JL^, rijalun plur. of J^>, rajulun "a
formed the plurals of UU> jabahm "a mountain";
also are , "a book";
..j^
spear";
j^
kablrun "great".
waf kutubun '
mudunun
of \J&3 kitabun ' '. o, of *JuJw madlnaftun
plur.
plur.
,
"a
city";
^^
sufunun
e)-jJts! e.g.
river";
'
^\
^J5
plur. of
'anhurun plur. of ^i nahrun "a
'ashhurun plur. of
J 'arjulun
w saftnatun "a ship".
y_'.^o
^&
plur. of J^L. rijlun '
shahrun "a month"; "a
foot".
36
Fourth Lesson.
Vocabulary. a word indicate that the Plural of the form given under that letter in this lesson. G o
The small
letters after
wasikhun a'bun
dirty.
hard,
diffi-
cult.
a way.
'ilmun
know-
j(b) \
ledge, science. c
nafi
-
un
useful.
galihun honest.
l(c)
u^ &??
sahilun easy.
pious,
$
^ JU* jb'o
harisun watchful.
the
->
oi ^ji Jalfuratu
Euphrates.
i
tarlquu
(d)
tawllun long.
Ju >
is
mukhlisun honest. sarfun swiftalmadl the past e
al att
(b)
the high.
saifun
qatiun
e"
,oS
9
^
O
a sword.
cutting.
First Part.
a
>
* C.2&S
Transcription.
huwa kitabun
c
kutubun sa batuu. wa'shshamu madlnatani hasanatani. almudunu arulumu nafituruqun eahilatun. kuwaiyisatun. ashshurutu sa'batun. 'atuD. huququn thabitatun. sa'bun.
raisru
huwa shahidun
shuhfldun silahun. alkilabu 'lharisatu. alqulubu sufunun sarfatun. al'afrasu hasa'linukhli^atu. natun. arauladu mutl'ftna. al'amtaru 'shshadldatu. alkalbu
salihun.
harisun.
al'auqatu 'Imadiyatu.
hurufu "rarabiyatu.
hum
'ikablratu.
aljibalu 'aliyatun.
nasun kibaruu. Exercise
The dogs cult
- The
are swift Difficult
way.
Arabic
manent
8.
and watchful.
ways.
The
letters are difficult.
An
rights.
al-
al'anhuru
assuyofu qati'atun.
It is a diffiindustrious boys.
They
are (^) per-
The high
honest heart.
mountains are beautiful. Are you great people? The No, .we are honest people. -- Useful books. Arabian cities are dirty. The Arabian sciences are The swords are long. difficult. The Nile and The past month. Euphrates are two great rivers.
The
little
babies.
Fifth
1.
Further forms of the Brpken Plural are: '
,f)
Vezir,
Lesson.
^las e.g.
minister";
9
-..
*!^j
wuzara u
*fy>!
plur. of
.
^
'umara'u plur. of
wazlrun -y*!
a
'amlrun
Fifth Lesson.
plur. of
sufara'u
"a prince"; *Jy --
87
"O
'usara'u
ambassador"; t\f*\
plur.
saftrun
^A^,
t>
"an
3
^!
of
'asiruri
"a
captiv".
This
form
a very
is
common
when they denote
^fjta
plural for words of the
persons.
-
iSUsi
g)
*SX*I
e.g.
'asdiqa'u
dlqun "a friend"; *llol 'anbiya'u
plur. of
"a prophet"; iL^J 'aqriba'u plur. of
^oy
relative"; *U*e! 'aghniya'u plur. of Js
o^*5
*
**a
O
ghanlyun
"rich".
^
,
fursanun plur. of ^.b farisun a-X G
buldanun
plur.
,,
of jjb
baladun "a
AL^ a 1
O
, o
oUxos
district";
qarlbun "a
>
o u-/
e.g. - o>
o t^b
rider";
*j
G -o
S ^oi h)
of
plur.
qudbanuu
plur. of .yC3i
qadlbun "a
rod, sceptre". 2.
Nouns with
four radicals (JJbe) have the follow.-
ing Broken Plurals: i)
JJL
e.g.
kaukabun "a
^^=\^=> kawakibu
star";
batun "an attempt".
y^'
tajaribu
In the same
j^>
office";
ijUS i
way
Cl-a
are formed the
jauharun "a jewel"; ~_~-^-+ maktabun
"a school, k)
plur. of iL?^' tajri-
.O-ci^
O_ti.,
plurals of
J***
plur. of ._*-*j^-~
x*xL maktabatun "a
library".
e.g.
fanajlnu
O*o from
Q^*
^ finjanun "a cup".
~ ,
.oU^> sanadlqu from -.
U*. khanazlru from
vjOx5 suudut^m "a coffer". O
o
J->
khinzlrun "a pig".
38
First Part.
In
same way are formed the
the
O
plurals
from
Jo-
sultanun "a sultan"; oyjCo maktubun "a
letter":
qindilun "a lamp"
This form .is used for tbe_ plural of all words^ of^ four radicals which have a long voweMjetween Ihe third arid fourth radicals.
e.g.
form used specially
AJJLs a rare
1)
6
for living beings
9
r
jo^Ljtalamidhatunpl.of js^Jij tilmldhun "a scholar"
The
3.
following words deserve special notice:
5o, ibnun
^[
'-
-
"a son
I^ur-
- os
,
QJ^J banflna or 2Luf
'abua'un.
'ibnatun or o^iJ bintun "daughter,
'akhun
"brother",
plur.
_jj>!
girl", plur.
'ikhwatun
or
'ikhwanun. *
O
o
&
{>
c^>t 'ukbtun 'Note
1.
"sister", plur.
Some nouns have two
, ~
$
o!^>t 'akbawatujQ. or
more forms of Broken
O
G , bahrun "sea" has j^^ buhurun, j^^- biharan, SKO -&Z abhuran and ^j^t abhSrun. j3R? Note 2. Some words have different forms of the Broken 6.0.
Plural
e.g.
1 -
^,
o,
Plural with different meanings
e.g.
c>uO baitun means "a bouse" o
or "a verse of poetry".
In the former sense the Plural
is
o
.*
buydtun, in the latter
oLoi
abyatun.
Vocabulary.
9
-
c,li farighun
empty. O
u*^
naftsun precions.
*
f*^=> karlmun noble. (Other words in the lesson.)
,1
Fifth Lesson.
Exercise
39
9.
Transcriptioii.
walwuzara'u gha'ibUna. annasu agdiqa'u mukhli^una. maalbuyutu- Taliyatu kuwaiyisatun. aghniya'u. kfitibu nafi'atun. arrimalju assalatinu kibaruu. basatmii hasanatun. almu'allimana tawllatun. mabsfttttna wa'ttalacaidhatu mujtahidHna. a^undt?.qu hadirftua
assufara'u
aslran.
farighun. 'Ikabiratu.
'nnaftsu.
buldanim ghanlyatun.
albi^aru (albuhttru)
al'aqriba'u humu Ta^diqa'u. aljauharu annafsu 'Ikarlmatu. albanQna mujta-
bidQna wa'lbanatu muti'atun. Exercise 10.
The cups
The
pigs are animals. princes and ministers are is long. present. Long letters. Noble souls. The scholars are busy. The boys are contented, they are playing. The horsemen are tired. Are the ambassadors present? No, they are absent. Are you relatives? Yes, and we are friends. The big coffers. The jewels are precious. Beautiful verses. The brothers and sisters are present and the sons and daughters are absent.
The Sultan
is
are empty.
just. The letter
The
40
First Vart.
Sixth Lesson.
Declension. 1.
There are three cases in Arabic: the -Nominative Genitive,
(js. raf),
6
and .Accusative
oblique or prepositional Qi. jarr) " * *' _
(v_^aj nasb).
These cases are expressed: When the word originally has junation -M#~ whether it be a inasc. sitig. or fern. sing, or broken * ~by the endings un,in, an, (written plural 2.
a)
,*
I
}.
,(X/IV
^^ W>^-^^D) When
M
for the
-
the word has originally nojaunatinn hy_ foi the other caees^
nom., and a
When
the word is defined by the article or a in the genitive whether it baa nunation or not originally by_u, i, a.
word
following
Examples. a)
Nora
L* sariqun
4
\^>
sahibi-'lbaiti.
assariqa.
^2\
sahiba-'lbaiti.
vlo-L
41
Sixth Lesson.
Note
A
1.
word without + O >
Arabian grammarians
Note
-
^5
2.
Words which end
in
^5 preceded by kasra contract >
iynn and ^5
into
iyin into
in
qsdin "a judge"
(jtolS
for
.OS alqfidl;
(gen.) ^yto'JUl
oLL*
inudaf
ilaihi.
42
First
The word
that governs a genitive
but never takes the
means
"tlie
Jw>pl
Part,
article,
is
itself definite
thus Jo*, c^xl baitu rajulin
house of a man".
^&
baitu
'rrajuli
means
"the
house of
the man".
W
hen the governing word is^indefiiiite the prepositiQn"Timusi_be puT beSre_the followingjgenitim eg. i "GO, oyo baitun lirrajuli "a house of the man"; or u
Jc^LS
i
one
may
say
&
-s
}>
JoJl o_^o
'rrajuli (literally)
(i
Q^
O o,
oyo
baitun rain buyuti
"a house from the houses of the man". Vocabulary.'
43
Sixth Lesson.
*x
Transcription,
alfarisu 'ala gha'ibuni 'lyauma. zahri 'Ifarasi. al'amlru gha'ibun khadimu Tamtri ft'ddari. miftahu babi'lbaiti. abwabu 'Imadlnati maftuhatun. basatinu urnaru sahibun lizaidin. 'shshami masbhttratun. kalbu 'Iwaladi harisun. 'Ibaiti
?ahibu
c
kutubu
'ttalamidhati
dinati
nazlfatun.
qasru Tamlri
'rrajuli.
'aliyatun.
nahnu a?diqa'u buyQtu 'ima-
fi'lraadlnati.
arrijalu
badirOna
ft'lmajlisi.
ra'su 'Ibikmati makbafatu zaujatu 'Iqadl hasanatun. antum 'llahi. baitun min buyUti Taralri ft'ssUqi. hadirQna ft bustani 'Ijari. aljrau qabla 'ddari 'rraftqu
qabla Exercise 12. Is the
he
is
master of the servant in the house?
in the
You
garden of the neighbour.
friends of the
man.
The merchant
is
No,
are the present in the
44
First Part.
market of the city. The door of the house is open. - The man's dogs (dogs of the man) are watchful.
The king's ministers are present in the council. Is The physician is absent and the physician present? the wife of the physician is present to-day, -r Ahmed The gardens of the city is a friend of the judge. The relatives of the physician are rich. are spacious.
Seventh Lesson.
The Genitive (continued). 1.
final
o
The Dual and Sound plural masc. lose their with its vowel when they are followed by a thus the ending
genifiye;
o
ani
t
becomes
!_L_ a,
'
^j ata,
becomes ^5
aini
^-jAj
comes ^
u,
ai,
becomes
ataini
atani becomes ifJL
&
o
^~
Ina becomes
^j I
baita 'rrajuli
atai,
^
una be-
O3 I,
e g.
the two houses of the
man.
I
(
baitayi 'rrajuli the two doors -of the two houses of the man.
I
ibnata 'Iwazlri the two daughters of
jbaba -o-
c
,.0
Uij^
jjj^jjj
,.0-
'
'
e
learned".
of beauty jdhatu husnin "possessor " i.e.
beautiful
47
Seventh Lesson.
*
f
jj\
|
'
*
OT
I 1
abu j
e
lisanaini "father of
two tongues
dissembling".
ibnu khamslna sanatan "son of 50 years i.e. 50 years old". Vocabulary.
bakrin
Abu
)abu Bekr, (name of
e
j*
khubzun bread,
I
I
a man).
hadldun
qabilatun a tribe. j
j
an old man, head of a
banQ asadin (sons
Ishaikhun tribe, Sheikh.
of a lion), name of an Arabian
|
tribe.
1
J
f
bukhlun
{
liness.
zillun o
know-
ledge. lie.
mieer-
tujratun a room.
shadow.
I
(
O
ma'rifatun
kidhbun a
jamalun beauty.
zuhdun abstinence. j^j s-'
*~^
(luqmatun a \
bit (of
bread, ineat&c.).
nisfi'un
women,
o
>?
Exercise 13.
tajirun a merchant.
48
First Part.
Transcription.
mu'allirnQ
'Iqablhu
f
"Iwaladi
huwa abu
ibuata 'Iwazlri 'Iwasi'u mafttthun.
'Ibaiti
Taqli.
arrajulu
ibnu abl bakria kahasanata 'Iwajhi. bSbu
tblru'lmali.
huwa qalllu qabllatu
ilmin.
a^habu
lisanaini.
tial
huwa dhn
kutubu dhawl
Mlinin? La,
'ilmin nafi'atun.
ban! asadin hiya qabilatun rnina Tarabi. zaujatu 'lhakimi hiya dhatu husnin wa jamalin. hali Tamlru karlmu 'nnafsi. la huwa kathlru 'Ibukhli. - aslishajaratu dhatu zillin. zuhdu abl bakrin mashhurun. 'aina 'bnati 'Jqadl lauii'atani. qit'atu lahrain kablratun. finjanu luqinatu kliubzin saghiratun. ? kurslyu hadidiu ft lbustani. 'Jqahwati hadirun.
shaikhu
'Iqabilati "Ikathiru 'ImUli salil.iun.
Exercise
14.
The boys are stupid. The stupid boys are The physicians (Broken plur. f) are learned. present. The men The girls (Less. 5, 3) are beautiful. -
-
present are learned and the women present are beautiful. The tailor is bad, he is a liar (father of lying). Abu Bekr's servant is present and the two maidThe cups servants of Abu Bekr's brother are absent. are in the room.
One
No, they are
()
in the kitchen.
of the sons (a son of the sons) of the sheikh
50 years old. Is the merchant rich? rich and miserly (much of miserliness). are the friends of kings (Plur.
b).
is
Yes, he is The learned
49
Eighth Lesson.
Eighth Lesson.
Pronominal Suffixes. 1.
The Personal Pronouns
in two (^A^? damlr) jxist
9
forms:
a)
Independent
damir munfasil) or
attached as Snffires to nouns,
b)
O
verbs or prepositions
o>
standing alone
i.e.
a>
(J*aX/>
O
.^
damn* muttasil).
The
Independent forms have already been given in Less. 3, 6). 2. The forms used when attached to words are:
Dual
Sing. rd
Masc.
rd
Fern.
3 3
2 nd Masc.
2nd Fern. 1
hu l
2 ^
,
U* huma
i hunna.
ka
U kuma .->
|
.
J,
I/ kum. ^
^
^ kunna.
ki
(with a verb 3.
+& hum.
ha
Masc. and Fern. ^5
st
Plur.
-
I
li
na.
*
nl).
These Suffixes attached jp^ a noun correspond
pur Possessive Pronoun
e.g.
wb^
to
kitabuhu "his book":
attached to a verb or preposition they answer to our^
Personal Pronoun in the objective case
e.g. &j^t>
darabahu
"be struck him"; &ix minhu "from him".
Note 1. Nouns to which these suffixes are attached employ the forms which they have before a genitive i.e. they drop the nunation and in the dual and plur. the ,; while the words
OS vj! the
Os
O,
j,\
f>
1st
pers.
have the forms given in Lesson 7 (except that with %
pron. sing, they become ^1 abl,
s
^=>\
akhi,
hami).
Ambic Grammar.
4
^J?
50
First Part.
Note
The
2.
suffixes s
UP hums
hu,
*# hum are
ancf
a
changed
to
UP
hi,
ending in
^
i,
book", f froi
Note
him when attached
p$>
or (j
1
to a
word
XJuJ' kitabihi "of his
ai e.g.
kitabaihim "of their two books".
*>
The
8.
hima and
+5 kum and
suffixes
kumu and p& humu when
hum become
expressed
6.
may
be
it
by
The
oji^a
particle
expressed
0!
JsjJ
or
in Arabic
or
Oh! by
j
i_ilv^^
in
jo:
forms^of
Jw
ya saiyida nnasi "oh Lord of
For further
details see
Lesson
(the)
men"-
16.
Vocabulary. e
--
hibrun ink.
sa'atun hour, watch.
zainabu Zainab
j
dhahabun
(name of woman).
}'
gold.
'abdu 'rrahmani saiyidun
|
master,
Abdurrahman, (name of man,
lord.
1
"the servant of the
saiyidatun mistress,
literally
lady. f
mahmudun Mahmud,
I
|
j
(name
Merciful").
of
?
x
|
hasanun Hasan, (name of man).
fiddatun
himfirun
an
man). r
>{
fatimatun Fatima,
1
(name of woman). Exercise 15.
(*J
slave,
servant.
silver.
J
abdun a
ass.
au I
?
j
or.
hindun Hind, (name of woman).
52
First Part.
Exercise 16.
sons, the name of the the (name) of the younger servant, is the physician pre(small) is Hasan. sent? No, (0) my master, the physician is absent; the wife and son of the physician (Less. 7, 4) are present. Hast thou a gold watch (watch of gold) or a I have a silver watch, silver one (watch of silver)? Have you horses (plur. a)? Yes, (0) my master Are my servants in the we have horses and asses. market? No, your servants are in the garden. brother's wife is beautiful (beautiful of face).
Abdurrahman has two
older
(great)
is
Mahmud,
O
1
My my
mistress,
Yes, servant.
I
am
art'
thou content with
content.
He
is
(Q,)
thy slave?
content with his
53
Ninth Lesson.
Ninth Lesson.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
The Demonstrative Pronoun
1.
al-'ishara) in
dha
for
all
simplest form
its
Dual nom.
cases;
^jj dhaini; Feminine, Sing. tihi,
ace.
if
ta for all
^AJ
cases;
O
^3
!J>'
lo
dhani, gen. and ace.
dbl,
8
Dual nom.
o dhihi, ls
CJ
tani,
j
tl,
ao
gen. and
taini.
Plural for both genders and
*^t
Masculine Sing,
is:
cases j^t ula or
all
ula'i.
These forms are however rarely used. 2.
The words
IP (written fixing
simple forms above.
They
Sing. masc. IJ^P
Dual masc. nom. Gen. and
3.
adding
ace.
^p
&
ka
(in
the simple forms. Sing. masc.
for
some
They
M
for
to
some of
the^
Fern.
j^>
cases.
all
a tOJ> hadhani.
^j^
1),
all cases.
hadhaini.
ha'ula'i for
The words
6,
note
are:
hadha
hadhihi (rarely ^j^>) for
Plural
formed by pre-
for ^tbis, these" are
9 see Intro.
Fern.
olip hatani.
Fern. Joii hataini.
both genders and
"that,
those"
cases with
are
all cases.
formed by
interpolated ^)
Jto
are:
dhaka or
5Uo dhalika;
taka or >^Lu tika or usually w^l> tilka for
all
fern.
&s
54
First Part.
Dual masc. noin. y5o!J dhanika or ^5o!6 dhannika; and
gen.
^ijJ dhainika
ace.
^j
Fern.
nom.
y&Lu
tainika or
ace.
Plural u&ftjt
-I
if
the
tilaka or
all cases.
these
is
suffix !J^>
e.g.
article
defined by a following genitive. the demonstrative isplaced
^
^JJ\
son of the king" "this book of yours". "this
|j^>
ibnu
fXAxs'
'Imaliki
hadha
kxtabukum hadha
5. If the demonstrative is used pronominally as subject of a nominal sentence, then: a) If is
the predicate
necessary
a book
e.g.
e.g.
'Ikftabu "this book".
noun
pronominal
after
^!
(more rarely
both genders and
hadha
jJ>
But a
tainnika.
and the noun Jakes the
precedes~it
vjutfdT
or
Lu
If the__demonstrative qualifies a simplejaoun.
4. .it
tanika or ^fJs tannika; gen. and
ula'ika
ulalika) for
i
L,3 dhainnika.
or
is
an
and
no copula
indefinite noun,
\o& hadha kitabun."this
u>lii=9
is
.
b) If the
predicate
is
defined
by the
the
article
3rd pers. pron. is used as a copula to prevent the demonstrative from being taken adjectivally (as in 4) e.g. oJ^J!
jp
!JNJ>
hadha huwa 'Iwaladu
"this is the boy".
defined by' a following genitive or a pronominal suflix, the demonstrative is put first c) If
the predicate
and no copula your book". 6.
The
is
is
needed
e.g.
^jGbsa
Interrogative pronouns.
alistifham) are
^
man
"who", U
ma
!J^>
(j,l$ix*/5S?
"this
^
is
ism
"what" (sometimes
Ninth Lesson.
55
a
- .
lou madha),
^5 aiyun fern, jul aiyatuu "which", kam "how much? how many?"
^ relation
is
indeclinable
is
expressed by placing
(^^^
The
mabnl). after
it
a
genitive
noun
e.g.
Q, obtf kitabu man "whose book?"
U is
is
written
also indeclinable.
as
*
,
s^
Jv?
U
UA
Exercise 18.
This is a good man and that (fern.) is a bad woman. This is the judge. This judge is upright and that These friends of thine are rich. physician is learned. This son of the sheikh is amiable and that daughter of his
is
beautiful (of face).
thy desire?
pen and
thou
I
master, what
desire) is
is
paper (and)
.
sons has Abdurrahman? this
O my
want (my
Who is the minister's son, this or that? the minister's son. Whose son is Hasan? is How the son of Abdurrahman.
ink.
- This is Hasan
many
What
book?
He
No, I have that.
Hast has five. This dictionary
57
Tenth Lesson.
is
I
What
useful.
How am 50
is
These two
of 50 years).
My name
thy name?
old art thou (how years old (my life
many is
is
years
50 years, or
men
is
thy I
Hasan. life)?
am
a son
are friends.
Tenth Lesson.
Adjectives. 1.
Some
of the commonest
IL[ ism
forms
of
adjectives
sifa) are:
the present participle)
a) J^cli fa'ilun (properly
A
e.g.
ft
*
ol* sadiqun "upright", i>U
'adilun
"just",
J^L>
jahilun "ignorant". G
b) J^uis
6 fa'llun e.g. .Xou* sa'ldun
kablrun "great",
c) Ojjii
^S
kathirun "much, many".
fa'ulun denoting intensity e.g. r,
Q^J*
fa'lanu
ta'banu "tired", 2.
J^> jahulun
j ^
"very ignorant", 3j*~S kasalun d)
6
"happy", y^
"very- lazy".
(without
U*iot
nunation)
e.g.
o lwu
ghadlbanu "angry".
Adjectives denoting colours or bodily defects
have the following form: Masc. sing, jj
afalu. 6 a}
Fern. sing. *Su
Plural for both genders Joe fu'lun.
fa'la'u.
58
First Part.
E.g.
Sing. Masc. ^M!
aswadu, black
uol
abyadu, white
j?\
ahmaru, red
blue ijjf azraqu,
akhdaru, green t\~. a?faru, yellow
atrashu, deaf (j*jZ>\
akhrasu,
^j
>,o
-o
yu,J
^^
_^
jJ
..)
iU^ >CM>
,0 c
, O^CK,
^
jif
*
(Less. 36, 7)
l3|
^
) . , o
63
kataou they (men) have
{
fkatabna they (women) have written.
(
^ "
2.
masc.
*
,,
- -
iLLlt
f&=>
hadara 'Imu'allimQna wadha-
habu, the teachers were present and went away. 6. Sentences according to Arabian grammarians are of two kinds:
The Verbal sentence (0**J!
a) fi'llya)
when
the verb (jJUj I)
(called in this case
J^UJ
f
is
n
iJuJ-t
al~jumla
al-
followed by the subject
al-fa'il) e.g.
kataba >oj JJaT
zaidun "Zaid has written". b)
ismlya),
The Nominal sentence
when
(il*-!^? idljl aj-jumla al-
the subject (here called IJJllI almubtada'
65
Eleventh Lesson.
"that (with which) predicate
begun" comes
is
alkhabar) be a noun or
(j+?-\
o
an adverbial clause or a verb
waladun "Zaid "Zaid
(he)
The
it
Jo
its ,,
jo
-Vj
equivalent, e
o,
j^
zaidun
zaidun
kataba
often put before the perfect be translated "already", be omitted in translation.
particle
may
qad
is
may sometimes
It
it.
strengthen
sometimes
vlja"
boy", has written".
Note. to
a
is
e.g.
whether the
first,
Vocabulary. -
r9
j
fahima
under-
to
"
v
c
j^
stand.
naharun day.
o
Oo,
saidun hunt,
OjS qaulun speech. --r
to
r
rise
(tala'a 1
;
| \
(of
qabila to receive.
the sun). the sun).
sham sun
guest,
to set (of
gharaba
kasara to break,
sun.
kubbayatun
glass,
qamarun moon. ba'atha -
to
fqasada {
after,
to
send,
strive
make
for.
fallahun peasant,
sa'ihun traveller.
hakimun governor. -
-
-
f
1
dakhala
g
to
enter,
into.
r
raja a to return.
'^>
kharaja to
(3jl
nazala to alight.
e
i\A
go. out.
ba'uda to be distant. towards,
ma'un
water.
j+> khamrun wine. ft
r.
about. {nahwa
nisfun half,
-
haushun courtyard. Arabic Grammar.
sa'atun hour.
66
First Part.
>j wajada to find. 2
f
tff
ghanfyun
He. - -
(plur. g)
v^
rich.
\
G
fariha to rejoice.
^5
jtalaba to seek,
3
1
require.
'
^>F r
fataha to open.
-06
ghulamun youth.
f
JJL>
ta'amun food. jalasa to
sit.
Exercise 21. ^
u ^
,b
,
-
,
.,
*
J
U
t
(Intro.
j
9)
r
ir
/
x
~
,
s.
(Intro.
11, 3)
Twelfth Lesson.
67
Exercise 22.
The verb
always to be put at the beginning of sentences.
is
Have you written your letters (plur. k)? Yes, we The beggar sought food have written our letters. The maidservant opened the door of the from me. Hast thou gone out to the hunt to-day? No, house. I did not go out to the hunt, I went into the city, Has the sun set? Yes, the sun has set (accus.). Mohammed and his sons and the moon has risen. entered the city and went out (dual) of it. The men sat. We returned from the hunt and sat. They drank (the) coffee. I received the guest at my house
O
this night.
(^JUc)
from the market?
O
the peasants.
I
maidservant, hast thou returned alighted
girl,
at the
house of
(j>J^)
hast thou understood what
I
say (my speech)?
Twelfth Lesson.
The Verb with 1.
When
of a verb
it
Suffixes.
a personal pronoun
is
attached to
forms given in Lesson 8
is the direct object as a suffix in one of the
it
e.g.
y^L^fc darabtuka "I have
struck thee", ,joyo darabani "he has struck me". Note. the suffixes
The e.g.
otiose
J,_^Jyto
{
in the 3 r
$
U
is
added to the
2nd pi ur mas c. before the .
darabtumtlha "you have struck her".
suffixes
e.y
First Part.
68
S -o,
The verb
kana "to be" is weak Jow inu'tall. See Less.- 23, 1) and its conjugation will be explained in Less. 27, but it is needed so often that the Perfect 2.
is
given here.
Sing. 3. masc.
J}
tf
kana he was.
,,
3.
fern.
oj
,,
2.
nlasc.
o-^ kunta
2.
fern.
^JS
1.
masc.
a. fern.
Dual
3.
masc.
,,
3.
fern.
2.
Plur.
kanat she was.
Lxjl^
masc.
a. fern.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
Ijjfc'
1.
masc.
The
kanu they
(f.)
were.
(m.) were.
kunna they
\JS
a. fern.
were.
(f.)
J
^^
fern.
(m.) were.
kanata they two
p&S kuntum you
2.
wast.
I was.
kana they two
^yf
2 masc.
,,
(f.)
Uxlf kuntuma you two were.
O JO ,.
wast.
(in.)
kunti thou
^^jS kuutu
\j'tf
thou
(m.)
kuntuuna you
kunna we
(f.)
were.
were.
were.
^
is _ used with the of Perf.j)j express the Pluperfect of the latter, the ajupther subject being often jjlaced between the two "verbs e.g.
3.
Perfect
verb
to
zaidun kataba \ -
-
'.
-
-
-J
-r
1
O^
(
Zaid had
written.
kana 'rrijalu sharibu the men had drunk, (cf. Less. 11, 3 b).
69
Twelfth Lesson.
^
When,
4.
0-
used as a copula
is
is
khabar)
(^>
Less. 30, :*7 xj| *
5.
j^oun
.'.- .
v
,-
^b
.
C)
,
(see
a
j
I
O
(j-Vc^>
1?
j
m
masdar)
attached to
fariha farahan
'Imaliki
j.JQy
may the
this,
govern
he
its
own Verbal
When
accusative.
an
the two words together _ are
bv an adverb
'aziman,
"he rejoiced a great
bnata
kana 'Ibustanu kabiran the garden was large.
verb in Arabic
Any
?
I
tt
translated in English
e.g.
'--.t.^^r
rejoiced greatly cf. Less. 34).
lJ> j ,,J*
(literally
rejoicing",
Vocabulary.
%
nab
Fatima was the king's daughter. kana zaidun waladan Zaid was
(
>
is
kanat fatimatu
I
c^ott
J
Ali (name of man).
'allyun
1
Jui qatala to ?.'?'
****
.^^ I
^
fqal'atun fortress, citadel.
1
- -
*
-
f
Selim, (name of man).
I
i
wares,
u),
goods.
sami'a to hear.
*
^
sallmuu
"
bada
kill.
i
asara to take prisoner.
\
f
S
c
J* bal but.
)
aduwun
*\
(pi.
^
slj^i
a'da'un) enemy.
Exercise 23. t,
.
Go-
., ,
-
Ls
j'uj
irf
.
Oo
bS
J^j
s
i
iLiJ iju^f
c,
t^Joj/to
iJ^
-
JwP
j>
is dJtf
'UCU
(Less. 7, 2)
*&
&>
\S
U Exercise 24.
Have you
struck them (fern.)? No, struck them, the men have struck them.
we have not This news
71
Thirteenth Lesson.
This The king was just. has reached me. Wast thou present yesterday sheikh was learned. in the assembly? children, No, I was absent. me? were you diligent? girl, hast thou understood The girls were present I have understood thee. (plur.)
The Her name was Hind. rejoiced greatly. O king took the enemies prisoner and killed them. merchants, where are your wares, have you left them We have in the house? Have you heard it? and
heard
Hast thou (oo!) written
it.
They both wrote
sister write it?
it,
or did thy
it.
Thirteenth Lesson.
The Imperfect. 1.
The Imperfect
tense (p'u^L! almudari') ex
still unfinished and is translated in English by the present, the future~"or when used without q, conunction after another verb by the present particile
an action
*
e.g. ^4^-1
'Ikhamra "the
, ~ -
,
o _j^ixj
ijJUft ij*JL> jalasa
men
sat
drinking
'nnasu yashrabuna "they were
(literally
drinking") wine". 2.
The Imperfect Stem
consists of the three radicals
the second baying, no vowel, having a, i/or u (the dictionary always tells which is used with each verb). The persons are expressed by prefixing ya, ta, 'a and~na to the stein with the of -the Yerb 1 _thefirst
addition in some cases of suffixes also. The Moods ai'e indicated by adding the vowels u for the Indicative, a for the Subjunctive to the last radical^ which is left without vowel for the Jussive!
and mood:
Prefixes indicative
suffixes
added
to
imperfect stem in
72
First Part.
3.
masc.
3.
fem.
j 3.
I_Ij* :
_j
masc.
2.
3.
2.
masc. fem.
m.a.f.
o c
j 3.
l
,U_Is
m.
a. f.
J
Full form
=
,,
o.
masc.
3.
fem.
niasc. ,.,._
fem.
1.
m.
thou
/taktubu
'
{
1.
masc.
Dual
3.
masc.
"
3
fem
Plur.
-
-u
(i.e.
(or
taktubu she writes.
masc.
fem
j3
will
a.
thou
(fem.)
writest.
aktubu
fem.
(masc.)
wrjtest
rtaktublna '
___ j
f.
fyaktubu he writes
\
2
a.
_j
W>):
,-
2.
*,I_Ij
of Imperfect Indicative of -
Sing.
fem.
2.
___
imperf. stem
j
C)3
t
j 2.
,.,!
2 fem.
1.
3.
masc.
I write.
fyaktubani
^ (mascJ raja'a "to return", Imperf.
yarjfu.
Verbs of the form JjJ
b)
as
^-^
shariba
yyi
"to
drink",
fa'ila
generally take -L.
Imperf. hasiba "to esteem",
(v-^> hasaba
Imperf. v-^^^r. yaljsibu.
"to reckon"
makes ^w*o^ yahsubu). c)
Verbs of the form
jJii fa'ula
karurna "to be noble", Imperf. 4.
take ___ as
^
Xj yakrumu.
The Imperfect
action, but
it
may
in itself denotes only unfinished be made to indicate the future by
putting the independent word vJj*. saufa before
it
prefixing the
saufa
yaktubu or 5.
contraction
sa,
e.g.
^JsLl soyaktubu "he
The Imperfect
future meaning) Sing. 3. masc. 3.
*.
fern.
of
^
wJciu
*J^
will write".
(which generally has a
is:
o-*^ y a^ unu ^ e w ^^ ^ e 1
or
ta ^ unu sne
w '^
-
^e
-
74
First Part.
'
takunu thou
Sing. 2. masc.
thou
2. fern. 1.
,,
n Dual !
Q
3.
akttnu
a. fern,
-
masc.
fem
{-
masc.
a.
fem.
6.
3.
fem.
2.
masc.
2.
fem,
1.
masc.
The
(ra.)
win be they
two
(f.)
will be.
takttnani
Plur. 3. masc.
,,
shall be.-
/takunani -
I
2.
I
wilt be.
(f.)
si- /yakunani they two
-
o
"
masc.
(m.) wilt be.
you two
will be.
yakuntma they (m.) will be.
yakunna
they (f.) will be.
takQnftna you (m.) will be. :
yCi a.
o nakunu we
fem.
Perf. of
takunna you
,^ used
(f.)
will be.
shall be.
with the Imperf. of another
verb gives to the second one the meaning of the Latin J^G." Go^ --^ kana zaidun yal'abu "Zaid imperf. e.g. v_>jdj J^\
^
was playing". used with the Perf. of another 7. The Imperf. of^l/ verb gives to the latter ^the meaning of the Futuree.g. vlJjr J^ ^ysj' yakttnu zaidun "Zaid will have written".
perfect
kataba
Vocabulary.
shan un
street.
itauftqun success (of God)>
{
'arafa to la iba to play. '
allahu God.
know.
aghniyft>u (plur of 1
2
u^ghanlyun)rich.
75
Thirteenth Lesson.
!E suffix
hum
^x^-I
hammalun
ahadu-
one of them).
dhahaba
to
(
go away.
himlun
\
faina where? whither? \
burden.
zuhrun midday. c
i
i
da 'zzuhri, in the afternoon.
|ba
dukhanun smoke,
I
tobacco. Exercise 25. 9
-c
o,S Liau'uiiJ
porter.
load,
Q4J tiU* wJLu
^
76
First Part.
dJj
!3U
C
jilj (accus. cf. Less.
12, 4)
Exercise 26.
Dost thou smoke? I do not smoke. Will you two be present to-morrow with us? No, we shall be absent. What does he desire from me? He desires his right from me. The girl sat playing with Zaid knew (use I did not
us.
l/
,.
}
with imperf.) the sheikh of
know him.
the tribe.
The
porter will
Dost thou undercarry the load to (Jl) thy house. stand what I say (my speech)? No, I do not underThe men were present going to the hunt. stand it. When wilt thou return from the hunt? I shall return to-morrow Will this news (plur.) reach him? It will reach him in the afternoon. The king will
be
much
The sheikh smoked f.^ with
just.
tobacco.
wares to
my
merchant,
house?
The
wilt
porter
imperf.)
thou send the will
bring them
to thee.
Fourteenth Lesson.
The Moods 1.
which
of the Imperfect.
The Imperfect (g^'ualt are
distinguished
almugtari') has three
Moods
by the vowel of the third
77
Fourteenth Lesson.
In this
radical
it
resembles the noun with_jts__three
(Hence the
case-endings.
terra
g^'wax
which means
"resembling".) Arabian grammarians treat the imperfect as a noun,
Note. thus,
where we should say that the conjunction ^! anna "that" Arab says that the particle
requires the F bjunctive Mood, the-
as ,.!
governs the imperf. in the accusative.
The three_Mpod3 The
1)
are.t
Indicative ending in
nominative, and
hence
almudari' almarfu',
The
2)
to
called
The Jussive
pj**?l
'f\
and
JL
in
Sflhjnnntiye pndinpr
the accusative
called
e.g.
corresponding.
v-jj^allf
with a vowelless ending correspond-
almudari' ahnajzum
The Jussive
but reappears
dropped,
alwasl
e.g. L.jJ>XI
!
e.g.
originally
before a
v*^H
p.uz\
^OXj yaktub.
ended
in
which
is
now
word beginning with hamzat
yaktubi-lkitaba.
The Imperfect Subjunctive
2.
?j'**l
^JOu yaktuba.
ing to the genitive and called ..i>al
Note.
to the
^JjCj yaktubu.
e.g.
almudari' almansub 5)
Corresponding
declined as follows:
is
Dual.
Singular. 3.
masc.
' taktuba.
2.
masc.
^okj" taktuba.
2.
m.
2.
fern.
1.
m.
a.
f.
u^*^
taktubi.
is]
aktuba.
:
a.
f.
Ljjsj
taktuba.
First Part.
78
Plural. 3.
masc.
l^-0
li
gJSL
;jO, rf)j
^
,
^
0o,o l
Vj'u -
o -
ULSXJ
Exercise 28.
We
requke thee (from thee)
(see Less.
16, 6)
sleep (so that
with us.
he might
sleep).
He
(fern.)
to
entered
be present the bed to
The women intended
First Part.
80
to go out of (from)
the house.
him
he would do.
to see
what
(L)
I
sent a boy with
Mohammed and
I intended to go to (Jit) the market. shall return to the house to see what thou art doing. I have commanded the servant to appear (be present) before me. They went away until they entered the I have promised him that that shall be a city. secret between me and (between) him.
his servant
Fifteenth Lesson.
The Jussive. 1.
The Jussive Mood
almudarf
Fifteenth Lesson.
^
The verb
2.
when
81
in the Jussive loses
the last radical
its^ (see Less. 27)
vowelless (see Intro.
is
masc.
3.
^xi'
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
l.-m.
3.
masc.
byL yakunu
takun
3.
fern.
Gyj takun a
takun
2.
m.
^Xj yakun
3. fern.
.i j,yC5
a.
f.
I
13, 3) e.g.
Dual.
Singular.
a.
f.
ijAi
takun a.
takunl akun. Plural.
3.
The
a)
Alone,
command sense
it
Jussive
yak tub
"So
him
the ^ loses
let
him
b)
After
annahyi)
,&
.
the 3 rd pers. to express a "let
him
write".
In this
generally strengthened by a prefixed
^JjCll liyaktub "let particle,
in
especially
e.g. v_^JJo
is'
used:
is
e.g.
If ^J precedes this
vowel eg. u^xXJb falyaktub
write".
i
e.g. *$
its
write".
-3
la
Arabic Grammar.
la
used for prohibitions
._.r^-.v
i
la
taktub
(^-JIl!
"do not
i
la
write".
takun gha'iban "be nqt absent". 6
82
Ffret Part.
c)
After
jj
lam used
to
deny a statement.
the Imperf. has the force of the Perf.
lam yaktub "he has not CJ lamina
Note.
e.g.
It is also
u^xXj .J used after
in the sense "not yet".
In the
protasis sentences, (see Less. 57). d)
written".
Here
The
adding anna or 1 and 2, e.g.
and apodosis of conditional
may be rendered more emphatic by thus forming the so-called modus energicus
jussive
an,
Modus energicus
I.
Modus energicus
IL
Fifteenth Lesson.
83
These forms (not much used) are employed for and are often strengthened by prefixing
exhortation
the particle 3,
^JO^J
e.g.
surely write".
They la
layaktubanna
"let
him
are also used after the prohibitive
taktubanna "thou shalt not write". Vocabulary.
(ghadibatobeangry
side,
janibun
(followed
by j^).
dlquu anxiety, need. i qadara(i) to be able.
mana'a
to prevent,
* -I|ghairun >.-
&
L another than
shai'un thing.
_
G
-
(gharlbun |
pi.
t(i
ji
another
(noun).
dukhnlun entrance.
strange
kadhaba(i) to
ghuraba'u.
daqiqatun minute. qala to soy.
maudi'un place.
cr
makanun
nQrun
light.
Exercise 29.
vj (Less. 16,
L^s 4 a)
s
G
.Cyjf
oL
he.
lie.
84
First Part.
gui
Exercise 30. I
not
did
understand it. girl, do not (
J)
know
(*>)
the affair and
did not (.J)
do not open the door. The pupils were idle and did not
boys, lie.
write the letter.
O
boys, be not idle.
They
heard your epeech and- did not understand it. Do Do not prenot leave your friends in (the) anxiety.
me
vent
from entrance
Be not angry
to (out) you.
The Let us drink (the) coffee. girl. father and his son were not able to return to their house that they should return). (. with me, o .
.
.
Sixteenth Lesson.
The imperative, 1.
The Imperative
>^i
fi'l
jJi
aFamr
is
formed
jrom the Jussive by omittiug the pronominal prefix, but as a word in Arabic must not begin with a yowelless letter (see Intro, fc? 2) a hauazat alwasl (Intro. 11) su]> ported by t is prefixecT__This hamza" takes the vowel
_
if the second radical has radical has oj e.g.
_ _
kataba, }
uktub.
Jussive
_
,
vS
but
__
if
yaktub,
the second
Imperative
85
Sixteenth Lssson.
daraba, Jussive
y^**y
yadrib,
Imperative
yamna',
Imperative
idrib.
vytol
Jussive
maua'a,
}tjjs>
.>Uj
imna'. j.
iic*
oUlT
it
J^H
"go to the door and open 2.
The Imperative
is
idhhab
'Ibabi waftalihu
ila
it".
nd naturally found in the 2 pers.
only: Sing. 2. masc.
Dual
2.
masc. and
Plur.
2.
raasc.
fern.
3.
-*^' uktub\3
o^
is:
The Imperative
if it
is
negatived
by ^ with the
b).
Direct address (the vocative)
The
nktubna.
^
Jussive (see Less. 15, 3 4.
uktuba
LXJ'!
fern.
of
uktubl
^1
2. fern.
The Imper.
uktub
ji '!
is
introduced by:
a) particle \ ya followed by a noun, which, stands alone is put in the nom. without the article
88
First Part.
and without nunation by a
genit. is
in the sing.; but if
put in the accus.
"Oboyl"; Jjf jJc'
I?
"O
'llahi
followed
ya waladu
[>
jjj
e.g.
ya
is
O
o
Jots
-an
each of theTBiffiple form
increase").
this
latter,
consisting of "the three radicals, with the addition of one or more letter^ajidhavjng"g. meaning -whfoh * H a mnHififtation of that of~the Simple These with the simple form are designated by e numbers 1 to 15. Of these the first 10 only are in common use^ and the ten seldom occur from any one root. The forms of a root in actual use are given in the dictionaries. 2. General list of the Perfects in each of the 15 forms with its modification of the root meaning:
L
Simple form: fca
(see Less.
fa'ala, joti fa'ila or
Forms increased by one II.
jJe fa'ula
11). letter:
JJI fa"ala, (with doubling of the second radical).
Meaning: Intensive as '^s> qataV'to cut", qatta'a "to cut to pieces"; or
"to know",
c
'JLti
causative
as
(JU
^Jai
'alirna
allama "to make to know, teach".
95
Eighteenth Lesson.
HI. the
fa'ala
J^
introduction of an alif after
(with
first radical).
Meaning: Relation of the action kataba "to write", or Attempt
^:M
alqat'
jjf
cf.
person
as
kill,
10; the
kill",
fight".
afala (with prefixed
Intro.
^jS
kataba "to write to someone";
do the action as JJ3 qatala "to
to
jj&*qatala "to try 4o IV.
to a
first
hamzat
^L&IT gjl*
radical losing
its
^ ,
vowej). *
..
o
E
Meaning: Causative as ^^Jb- jalasa "to sit''..^^? ajlasa "to
make
to sit".
Forms increased by two cc
V. jj^j tafa ala (with prefixed
letters:
o
and doubling
ta
of the second radical).
Meaning: Reflexive of jjj
II.
as 5Jbi qallada "to gird"
taqallada "to gird oneself".
o
VI. j^llf tafa'ala (witl^ prefixed introduced after the first radical).
Meaning: Reflexive of
III,
ta
and
alif
as J3i qatala "to fight",
taqatala "to fight one another".
VII.
jJtlj?
infn'ala (with prefixed
hamza here and in hamzat alwasl, cf. Intro. he
all
hamza and nun
the following forms being 11).
Meaning: Originally Reflexive of
I
but generally.
as a Passive as u^sed '^=> kasara "to break" inkasara "to be broken".
^ o ta
"~*=\\
VIII. Jjts^ ifta'ala (with prefixed hamzat alwasl and introduced after the radical, which loses its vowel).
Part.
First
Meaning: Reflexive of
I as ?c+=>- jaina'a "to collect,
unite" pt+>1 ijtaina'a "to collect themselves, to assemble".
IX.
if alia (with prefixed
jjist
gion of the vowel the^third radical).
Meaning: ~^s>\
of the
first
Used only
ihmarra "to be red";
for
hamzat alwasl, ^omig,and doubling of
radical
Colours
and Defects r fls
i'wajja "to be crooked".
^^[
Forms increased by more than two
letters:
X. Jou^Lj istafala (with prefixed ^v*[ omission of the vowel of the first radical).
ista_
and
Meaning: Properly Reflexive of IV as JUt aslama "to give
XI.
up" JL*JOJ istnslama "to give oneself up". 3t*s!
XII.
ifalla a rare secondary
,'kc^asl
form of IX.
ifau'ala
j^st ifauwaia
rape
f
^
Tms occurriug
}n
certain verbs only with
XIV.
.jJuisj
XV. 3.
Any
meaning 4.
Jjjiit
is
if'anlala
ifanla
verb in the above called
special meanings.
list
that has Reflexive
? .Lax uiutu\vi\
The imperfect
from the
])erfect
of the derived forms is foripefl according to the following rules:
a) The prefixes ya, til, alif, nun receive the vowej u_if the verb is increased by one letter only (II. III. IV forms), otherwise
97
Eighteenth Lesson.
The second radical receives the vowel i except Ibrms with prefixed ta (V and VI) when it
b)
the
in
Deceives
a.
The
first radical remains as in the perfect: the c) u for third radical receives the vowel of the mood the indie., a for the subj., sukGn for the juss.
Thejbamza at the beginning of some forms away in the imperT Thus the Imperfects are as follows:
in the
erf. lajis
Perfect.
Imperfect.
II.
Jots
fV'ala
III.
Jiis
fa'ala
IV.
jJtM
af ala
V.
Jobb tafa"ala
Joub yufa"ilu J^l^j yufa'ilu
JoJb
yuf ilu f
JotiL yatafa'
ali>
c
VI.
J^IAJ tafa'ala
VII.
Jotl>5
VIII.
ji-3^ ifta'ala
J^i^j yatafa alu
c
IX.
JUsl
X.
joilxx-l 5.
infa ala
Jjt^j yanfa'ilu
J**^
if'alla
joilj
istafala
Jj^*u
The Imperative
general rule (Less. 16, .omission of the prefixes^'
is
1)
yafta'ilu
yaf allu yastafilu.
formed according to tbg from the Jussive by tbg
becomes vowelless a hamza In the IV. form 13, 2). (Intro. 11) which receives the the other forms it is hamzat alwasl
If the first radical thus
must be put before it this is hamzat alqaf vowel a
and
(fatha); in
receives
i
Arabic Grammar.
(Intro.
(kasra). 7
First Part.
98
by
6. The Participles are formed from prefixing a mlm with the vowel IT
prefixed droppeoL The second radical' takes the"vowel in the Active, a in the Passive!
hamza i
the Perfects
The
is
Eighteenth Lesson.
99
7"
First
100
Part.
Nineteenth Lesson.
Form
II.
1.
Conjugation of
^ly
j.
"to break to pieces, smash'
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
etc.
Juss.
Subj.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Imperative
.I/
^5j~J
Part. Active
Part. Pass.
etc.
Verbal noun In some verbs there
Verbal
Noun
of the
is
a secondary form of the
form 3l*'
e.g.
from vj^>'
"to
welcome"
The Passive
is
in the
Perf.JJlr
etc. 2.
The form
Jsii
denotes:
etc.,
in the Imperf.
Nineteenth Lesson.
A
a)
^
break",
b) It (like
strengthening of the
jji^
Note. In these
^
"to learn"
-
in
II.
e.g.
jT
liar",
e.g.
.Woo
if
Simple
transitive in
it is
in
make (something) reach (someone
II.
e.g.
it
OJcT
has
"to lie",
the
meaning of thinking,
v_j
Jo "to esteem (someone)
used to form verbs from nouns
Go oJl>.
*
"skin,
leather"
bind (books)"; from j&glc
formed *jU
JjL,
is
formed
z
e.g.
,
jsJb*.
"to
skin,
,^UJt "peace be on thee"
"he greeted him"
i.e.
said "peace
be upon thee" to him.
Form j^.
III.
3.
,,Jb
to transmit)".
"to be sincere" .%vXo "to think (someone)
d) It is often
is
learn,
believe".
sincere,
from
to
a^
Sometimes
esteeming
"to
be numerous",
"to
becomes doubly transitive
it
"to reach", "to jJb
a
'^S
cases, if a verb is intransitive in the
becomes transitive
the Simple form,
make
"to
jiT "to make numerous, increase"; while
c)
e.g.
has usually a Causative or Factitive meaning
jJiM) e.g.
it
meaning
"to break into pieces, smash".
teach".
form, v**
101
Conjugation of
v-*i'
"to write to":
Imperf. Perf.
WOO
.
Indie. i^o'LXj
Subj.
Juss.
First Part.
102
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
etc.
etc.
Juss.
Subj.
etc.
etc.
Imperative vlo
^f
etc.
Part. Active
viol*
Part. Passive
sLjb
5
Verbal noun Passive, Perf.
4.
The form
of the action
to
more usually
^jlxi',
Imperf. Indie. JJlx!
v*jy
used to express the relation
is
jlli
a person
^>jS "to write", ^J*
e.g.
"to write to (someone), correspond with". It
also
something
very often
e.g.
Jjia
to fight"; 0L* "to precede", to compete with". 5.
The
the Accus.
j^li
form
an attempt
expresses
"to kill",
is
of the Person
Jjls
^l^
IV.
do kill,
"to try to precede.
always transitive and takes e.g.
xli'^
"he corresponded
with him", Uii "he fought with him".
6.
to
"to attempt to
Form jJS.
Conjugation of JJi^? "to
make
to sit".
Nineteenth Lesson.
103
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Imperative Part. Active
Part. Passive
etc.
Verbal noun
t
Passive, Perf.
The meaning
7.
factitive
and -.
^
It
(cf. jJki).
transitive
of the
makes
doubly
form
jJ^st
is
causative or
intransitive verbs transitive
transitive.
y^>
"to be present",
o
"to
make
"to
Many
sit",
be present
to ^
as
Imperf. Indie.
-.
i.e.
to
bring,
present";
o
Jb-l "to make to
sit,
seat".
verbs employ both the II. and IV. forms sometimes with different shades of
causatives,
meaning,
e.g.
'j->
"to inform"; while
inform".
and ^3-t are both used
means "to teach" and
to
mean "to
First Part.
104
The
form
joist
- o
^/-ot "to
do in the
"to
do in the
morning"; from sL** "evening" evening"; from p^LJ become a Moslem".
"Islam"'
"to
^
receive Islam,
Vocabulary. to
II.
;
speak to, address (ace.).
I
r*
i
to treat in
(III.
frier dly
1
half.
around.
IV. to destroy, to
to witness, III. to see.
way.
to kiss.
II.
to defend.
III.
a
be (literally do in the
'
if not,
except.
"to
i
morning"). horizon.
ramping.
to interrupt.
III.
>JJL> yd!
III.
pl.
to disobey, y>!3
5
only.
command.
speech. to send.
affair.
pl.
-'j^
j
..-
f
\
(^
to bring.
II.
"concerning").
I
}*
bedouin.
IV. to inform
father (literally "begetter").
IV.
to bring forward, present.
to
II.
JlS IV. to become dark.
O ;3
U
to
;^-to
ask advice equip.
of.
cause
to
reach, convey. pl.
III.
> j
(jojjaj
robber.
to attack.
105
Nineteenth Lesson. -
(immediately,
.
land.
take
to
II.
from.
news to
distance. to seek.
to be
mix,
III. to
^
to.
:
neighbourhood. c 1
I
\ -
;
fc
f
(
IV.
to
deprive, (with two accus.).
life,
(see Intro.
Note III
xi
frequent the of (ace.).
III. to f
-
^J f
have with,
(ace.). -
neighbour
society
(
-
good
to.
intercourse II.
(ad-
verbial accus.).
I
|
II.
I
to propose,
manage.
II.
to determine.
II.
to
6,
believe.
3).
to watch, ob-
tmvel
to
serve.
to cover,
P^ce, greeting.
overwhelm,
friendliness.
as
IV. to treat kindly.
to find.
Exercise 35.
s
t
xobs.it
--
clsJsJu
.
like
-
First Part.
106
(Perfect for the English Future)
(proverb)
J jJb
*LM
3
Exercise 36.
O
The judge comservant, bring us the coffee. manded them to (that they should) bring forward the robber. kiss thy hands. Convey to him
We
greeting.
I
my
have commanded
thee, o girl, to
convey
this I informed him of greeting to them. but he did not believe me. Do not believe this boy, o girl. The proposing is from men, the I ask advice of my friends determining is from God. in anxiety. Thou hast seen many cities and had intercourse with many peoples. Send that man to
my
affair,
(^
Twentieth Lesson.
me Do
that
so
I.
($)
not disobey
may
commands.
my
of (the) man.
I
treat
107
him
kindly.
(*-J;)
Defence
is
the right
bring thee the good news that
have conquered the robbers. Damascus. Bring in (cause
We
we
have travelled
Twentieth Lesson. .
V. 1.
The
prefixed
jJiii'
Form
form
is
the
same as the
jJis
with
o.
Conjugation of Juli' "to take over, receive": Imperf. Perf.
Indie.
Subj
etc.
etc.
etc.
Juss.
etc.
Imperative Part.
etc.
to
to enter) the physician.
Active
Part. Passive
JLliL* t
108
Verbal noun Irnperf. Indie.
Passive, Perf. ^JUo
The
2.
jj^i e.g.
t
It 2
is ..
the Reflexive of the
is
"to
-
jjtc
also
X^AS
teach"
pUj
"to
form
separate oneself
used to form verbs from nxmns '
"a Christian"
a Christian"; from a Jew". often
II.
teach oneself
"to
o -
,iLkflj
It
jJi
"to separate",
-;Js'
to scatter"; to learn".
from
V. form
is
formed
has the meaning
&
represent oneself as", ag. S
*-.
be haughty"; Ltf (from
o^ii'
"to
e.g.
'-
^o
"a Jew",
^50^
-
i.e.
"to
become
"to
become
think oneself,
to
"to think oneself great,
1
^^
"a prophet") "to represent
oneself as a prophet". VI. 3.
fixed
The VI. Form
is
Form. the
same
as
III.
with a pre-
o. Conjugation of
jjlai'
"to fight with
one another":
Iinperf.
Perf.
etc.
Indie..
etc.
Subj.
etc.
Juss.
etc.
Twentieth Lesson.
109
Imperative o -
G
,-
.,
,
Part. Active 9 j'
Passive
Part.
etc.
Verbal noun Passive, Perf. jjjjtf 4.
The
jsilij'
form
Imperf. Indie. the Eeflexive of the
is
III.
form,
4
e.g.
"to fight with one another", occurs in the Sing, its subject
JJIs "to fight", jjlii
therefore
the
if
verb
must be a Plural
or
a
Collective,
e.g.
men
fought with one another"; "the people fought with one another". This form is used more often than V. to mean "to "the
is
Collective)
represent
oneself as", f
blind"; oj*i
e.g.
"to
,^>L*j
to
pretend
be
"to pretend to be dead". Vocabulary.
jji - ,
c^L
V. to speak. (morning, ace. "in the morning". \
L***-^ a ^
^
necessary, duty.
V. to follow.
(
---
*j
%
1
IV. to narrate to one another, VI. to converse.
V. to show oneself brave
U
j
H^ 1
for-
to se P arate from one another, -
VI. to disperse.
when
>
*^ cr
V. to come ward.
V f
j
1
trace.
a ^v. accus.).
also.
-
frf
Li
(
?
f
after
-
'
from (the presence of
8K e '
'
.
.
..
direction.
First
110
j |
Part.
presence, appearance.
J (
r
^AJ5^c)
(plur.
tender feeling.
|
VI
to play
(to know, II. to \teach, V. to learn.
medicine.
(L->).
(thus, (
flame.
I
V. to remember.
j
\
to
(literally
"like that").
appointed,
speci-
V. to have the honour.
people.
V.
astonished.
extreme, extremity.
V. to be grateful. |
V. to wonder, be
be slow.
or
J>KxiJ
(plur.
VI. to meet one ristian.
another. f
VI. to be bold.
^
{
V.
say farewell to one another.
Exercise 37. - .0.0
G?
y"
o
li
**J ,.
,
,
,3
a*ot
,..
J
-
.
^
Exercise 38.
Do you
No, we do not speak speak Arabic? We conArabic. They did not speak with us. Hast thou learnt what thy versed about this affair. teacher has taught thee? Yes, I have learnt it. Do not These pupils learn the science of medicine. They separated from one another speak thus, o child. that they might follow the way and meet at (,3) an appointed place. astonished
was greatly astonished
I
the extreme
of astonishment)
at
(I
(^
was him.
Truly we are exceedingly grateful (we are grateful the The Moslems and the Christians excess of gratitude). said farewell to one fought with one another.
We
another so that we might disperse.
Twenty-first Lesson.
VII. 1.
Conjugation of
Form.
J&1
"to
break" (intransitive):
Imperf. Perf.
Indie.
y^^. .^W^AJ
Subj.
Juss.
First
112
Part.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Juss.
Subj.
Imperative Part.
Active
Part, Passive
etc.
Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.
Passive, Perf.
The
VII. form is originally the Reflexive of the Simple form, but generally it contains the idea of allowing some action to be done to one i.e. it has a 2.
Passive sense as
^LZ
"to uncover",
oJiXM
"to be
uncovered". 3. The VII. form is wanting in all verbs that begin with hamza, waw, ya, ra, lam or nun.
VIII. 4.
Form.
Conjugation of ^=>-\ "to assemble". Imperf.
Perf.
Indie.
Subj.
Juss. o
, o ,
113
Twenty-first Lesson.
Imperf. Perf.
Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Imperative r.
Part. Active
etc
Passive
Port.
-
Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.
Passive, Perf.
5. The ! "to strive with one another".
"to strive",
Vocabulary.
VIII. l*Ji to divide.
VIE.
(MM? division, part. o ,
jVlJL
"** \
13!
to
to
be
experienced.
approach
(with ;,).
see! behold!
Jut/>
to be mingled. 6
-
&S
plur. 31**! likeness.
Twenty-first Lesson.
Oli, youth.
deed.
-
115
nearness, neigh
to lash. flog.
bourhood.
armv.
a lash.
VIE.
I. "to
to confess
| I
(something
help,
VIIL
to
conquer (literally, "to be heh by God).
v_j).
ilLa> truth.
VIH.
to think.
VIIL
to
foot.
and VIII. to tremble.
I.
:
>
fear.
f
VIIL
1
self,
[VIIL whole,
I
all.
I
Exercise 39.
U
(Intro.
9)
-
honour.
to
busy one-
work. to
crowd;
verbal noun, "a crowd".
First Part.
116
l
,3
(
'from fear" adv. accus.)
li
\
Exercise 40.
We
Do
assembled in the neighnot expect us. We were exceedingly pleased that yon were present with us. The army of the Sultan was defeated (broken) and the Think not that thou hast conChristians conquered. We are quered us. Truly, he is honoured by all. not approach us. bourhood of the city.
Do
There was a great crowd diligent and work much. in the streets. The feelings of the men were stirred as they heard that. Work and do not play, o children !
Twenty-second Lesson.
IX.
Form.
Through the meeting of two similar letters at the end of this form certain assimilations and contractions take place in the conjugation, The rules for these are given in Lesson 23. 1.
Twenty-second Lesson.
Conjugation of
^>\
"to
be or become
117
red'
.
Perfect.
Dual
Sing. 3.
p.
3.
f.
2.
m.
2.
,
f.
Imperfect.
Indie. i.,0-
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
m.
3.
p. in.
3.
f.
2.
m.
3.
m.
J^T;
^i'
"^
.
(
3.
f. i:
M
"
Plur.
3.
>
'
m.
*
Subj. a
^
o -
Juss.
o-o.
Part.
First
118
Imperfect. Indie. Plur.
^
m.
2.
Juss.
Subj. l
I
3
^
Imperative. Sing.
2.
*
m.
=>
Dual.
Plur. 2.
2. fj
m.
2.f.
2.f.
., Part, Active
^s?
>
Part. Passive not used.
6^0 Verbal noun A^s>\. 2.
(for
The IX. form
is
Passive not in use.
used only for Colours and Defects
the corresponding adjectives see Less. 10, to
2),
e.g.
be or become black.
yellow, pale. white.
,,
red
,,
green.
crooked.
The very rare form XL jUst is according to some a stronger, according to others^ weaker form of IX. e.g. jU=>j.
"to be or
become
red".
Twenty-second Lesson.
119
X. Form. 3.
Conjugation of
Q^^J
"to esteem
beautiful":
Imperfect Perfect ,
,'
Iiidic.
Juss.
Subj.
0,0
O"""~
o
o
etc.
etc.
etc.
,
oE
etc.
Imperative Part. Active
Part. Passive
etc.
..
0, Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.
Passive, Perf. 4.
The X. form:
a) Is
originally the Reflexive of IV. e.g.
JL!
"to
give up" jJUJLl "to give oneself up". b)
Denotes "to desire
"to pardon" c)
la*j
or.
ask for oneself"
"to ask pardon".
Denotes "to esteem or think"
beautiful"
jl^w
e.g. ^ac.
"to
e.g.
think beautiful"
^>*s>
"to be.
(
oi
"to
be
First Part.
120
"to esteem (something) disgraceful,
disgraceful" *.*J&.\
wrong". has a Causative meaning,
d) Often
make
"to
swear", ^JJLs^J
e.g.
>JiL> "to
to swear".
Vocabulary. >
o -
Lk> world.
i,
plur.
_.x meadow.
&*
be big, X. to esteem great, im-
to
X.
to rejoice.
X.
to
portant.
esteem
forbidden.
Ajiil.
event.
(to serve X. to take into ones service.
opinion.
I
X. to enquire.
government.
X.
X. to receive.
to use.
reed, pen. future.
hard} ;..{
if
God
difficult.
.x> X. to enquire.
will.
Exercise 41.
U iJAi
Juu
o]Xl>? (Lesson
^
Ciij
J
L
9,
6
,J)
U
Twenty-third Lesson.
J Jcill* r
f
olcJ-l
l.'Ii?
>;
,^
(Less. 12, 5) U-J-^
IftiLl?
*jff
*
ilUxIf
121
>,
olbllj?
Uil^I?
x
Exercise 42.
Do
not esteem this event important. girl, I saw the men become why hast thou become red ? Do you think right (beautiful) what he pale (white). has done? The plants No, we think it disgraceful. I have taken this slave into have become green. He is taken into service by the government. service.
They have
received this foreigner well (a great re-
Do you
use this pen? No, we do not use is difficult. Do you think it right that I should take this man into service? I think it ceiving).
u$e
it,
its
this matter.
wrong.
Enquire concerning (^)
went out
to the reception of the vezir.
He
Twenty-third Lesson.
Classification of Verbs. 1
.
yerba are divided by Arabian grammarians into
jU
Sound a| b)
Not sound
These
ji). (fJL, '^,
latter are
9
:
jjii).
again divided into:
-j
JJts
i.e.
the Correct verb comprising^ (a)
"Doubled verb"
i.e.
the 2 nd and 3rd radicals are the
the
verb in which
same
(b
122
'jHamzated verb"
i.e.
the verb in which one radical
isa~Eamza! IL jjil jli the
^Weak"
waw
orjj_jgu
the radicals
a
is
JL-
Note. The terms
verb in which one of
&
and
are often used as identical.
In this case the doubled verbs and harazated verbs are regarded as Sound. The terms Regular and Irregular are sometimes used This use should be avoided loosely for Sound and Not sound. as all these verbs follow certain laws, though they suffer some changes of form due to the laws of contraction and assimilation.
Doubled,Verbs. following rules govern the conjugation of nd and 3 rd radicals are the same letter: verbs whose 2 2.
The
I.
These two identical radicals are written as one
wjth_tashdid
(or
as the
Arab grammarians say ^Uo^
"assimilation" takes place): a)
^^Lt
the l at and 3rd radicals have^vQwels (are
When
nd radical loses "vowelled"), in which case the 2 T
Uo
its_vowej, e.g. Jo from jJ3;
JJo (Pass. JJto
(III.
Perf.);
&
&S
from
from vijLb; Ji from
(Dual Perf.);
Jb
from
form); Jfi from JJIJ (Part. Act,).
The
Exception:
Pass. Perf. of III.
is
JJ^i.
9 b) If the
first
radical is vowelless
*
(^ L.)
and th^
3 rd radical has a vowel, in which case the 2 nd radical givesjip II.
its
its
vowel to the
When
the 3
rd
st ,
e.g.
3ij from
jJjsj.
Pd ladicaHsjvQwelless, the 2 ^retains
vowel and contraction
e.g. 2. Perf. Sing.
1
(fliop
does not take place,
Masc. Perf. v^i'o; Juss. JJjo Imper. JJoi.
123
Twenty-third Lesson. ..
Note
*
,
t *
Doubled verbs of the Joe and Jie form are thus
1.
only distinguished from those of the Joe form in the unconS
-
tracted forme, e.g. Jw
-
-
(= JJU) forms
in 2nd Sing. Masc. Perf.
O
,
oJLL.
Note 2. In the Jussive mood and in the 2nd Sing. Masc. Imperative contracted forms occur very often. In these cases, to prevent two vowelless letters coming together (Intro. 13, 3) at the end, the doubled letter takes a vowel (either fatha or or damma when has the Imperf. damma), e.g. kaera,
->,->,
f,
^
beside
JJ^o.
O ,0$.
S->"
Imperative:
GJO,
*
t
U^J, OJo and O^J
Jussive:
beside JJol. o >o
The other forms
of -the Imper. are formed either from JJoJ or from
3o
as
li ^O tyJ
but always
IE. When, the 2 Dd radical is separated from the 3 rd by a long vowel, no contraction can take plac. e.g. Part. Pass, 3.
jjix*; Verbal noun of IV.
Conjugation of 3^ "to show": Perfect.
Sing.
3.
m.
3.
f.
2.
m.
-f.
5o
Dual.
&
Plur.
bJo
vili
^ Vtt
LJUo
Imperfect Indie. OvXj
Juss.
Subj. ^JskJ
JJ^xJ,
also
OjJ
or
or
ixj
First Part.
124
Imperfect Indie.
Juss.
Subj.
33
33
o
Imperative. o,ot JJo!
=,
or
Jo
or
or or
Part. Active 3lo
Part. Passive
125
Twenty-third Lesson.
Passive. Juss.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Derived Forms. Perf.
Iraperf.
Irnper.
Part. Act.
jlS
jixi
JIS
JJ3J.
II.
Part. Pass.
in.
(Passive
iv.
33
v. VI. VII.
vm.
"
Jo^t
j
(The VIII. form of 3J> "to stretch out" here, because in the VIII. lation
=
3^
form of
(see Less. 21, 4, b.)
t
is
given
there is assimi-
First Part.
126
Perf. Imperf. IX. Seldom occurs.
Part Pass.
Part. Act.
Imper.
X.
Vocabulary.
then, thereupon.
j
determination.
((u) to stretch out, IV. to help, VIE.
^
V. to go.
to extend.
{
Jc>, pi. J^jo boundary.
tablecloth.
s
-
\
uncle
,.
c
(on
the
father's side).
i
as (with genitive).
_
people.
custom.
make
HI. to
Bedouin.
G;
,
((u) to narrate ("to"
(i
war.
**
o French-
man. (i)
to
(with
AXIS
determine
v
).
narrative, story, G-
-
Cairo.
history.
(u) to collect,
(u)to injure, VIII. to compel.
VII. to
(u) to
join (with ^o).
lieve, |
(u) to
\
[
be-
esteem.
count IV. to
to prepare, X. prepare oneself.
pi.
think,
time, fate, to
be cheerful.
il&j companion,
IV. to love, journey,
start.
extensive. pi.
Sjli
horses,
[subjects (i)
to be settled.
I
(of a
kingdom).
Twenty-third Lesson.
JaU^Ji
*1J 5
aj'
127
First Part.
128
UJ
li^
jJ JoJ?
J,f
jj
u
lil Exercise 44.
Yes, we have felt it. - Hast thou I did not pass passed by this place? by it, but I will pass by it to-morrow, if God will. Do you believe that he will appear before the judge? do not believe that. The rich people count their money. We have prepared ourselves for the
Have you
We
felt
the heat?
129
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
I Do you think him a brave man? thought him a brave man, but to-day I do not think
journey.
him
so (uJJs^).
are glad (rejoiced) of
it
We
presence rejoiced us.
Thy
Ring the
(w).
bell.
The
his speech, when (o) his fathernot speak much (make little thy speech). - I loved her He very much (a strong loving). The heat was too great loves her and she loves him. This city extends for us (strengthened itself on us). He deserves a great reward. to the sea.
boy did not complete
Do
entered.
Twenty-fourth Lesson. >o
^ u^)
o*,,
9
>
(o*r^
-a
> o
3
The Hamzated Verbs.
The Hamzated verbs
1.
to
whether the hamza
is
are of three classes
the
first
take"; or the second as in 3ll "to ask";
as in
In the conjugation of these verbs theJJQllQwing
employed
rulea are a)
or^the third
"to read".
\
2.
according
radical as in o^>\ "to
ft.t
(cf.
also Intro. 10):
bamza
the beginning of a word the
is
always
written with alif e.g. G
at
jt is written
waw
(Indie. Imperf.
the end of A syllable fl.mj__hfla with alif after ffl^ha^^with^ya^ after I.)
;
*3- (1. Sing. Perf. Pass. Arabic Grammar.
jlamma.
e.g.
iXi^j (Indie Imperf. Pass. .
I.
I.)
;
of llJ> "to conceal"); o!^3
First Part.
130
(1.
Sing. Perf.
I.
of
Ti
^
"to read");
IV. of
(Part. Act,
^if "to be true, believing"). c) is
Kithaskasra
or
damma and
waw
written with ya or
e.g.
^j
follows fatha jt
"to despair";
^^
"to be brave".
At the end of a word
Exception.
when
with alif even Indie
I.
of
d) If is
it
e)
written
has fatha and follows kasra or damma,
it
waw e.g. UJJ
has kasra or
damma and
written with ya or
letter, it is
,
(Imperf. Indie, of
(Imperf.
waw
it
(Iraperf. Indie. II.
(Part. Act.); ^Jo (Perf. Act.
JdJI
If
is
Tjs).
it
written with ya or
of JiS);
it
follows fatha e.g. \JL (Imperf.
I.).
follows a vowelless
^Lu
e.g.
or
0,
r^); uj*j
(_
(Imperf. Indie, of
Indie. III. of 'jL);
jJLl
(Part. Act.
I.).
f) If it has fatha and is followed bv the alif that jengthens the vowel, the latter is written with maddj^
(see
Intro.
(Part.
12.)
Act.
I.
and follows an
e.g.
3^-T
(Perf.
III.
of J^f);
1>T
If however it has fatha of the same). alif that lengthens the vowel, ItTs writlen
mdependently
e.g.
3 lL
(Perf.
III.
of JU).
hamza
is prefixed to the first radical and a hamza, then two hamzas will conie^ together, in whi^h case alif with madda is written in jjace of both.. The III, form and the IV. forifL.will
g) If a
that radical
is
thus be identical in the Perf.
J^>7
(III.)
"to blame".
e.g.
^T(IV.)
"to believe";
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
131
IJjie prefixed hamza has kasra or damma. the root is ciianged into the ya or waw thai:
hamza ojme
o
the vowel
lengthens o
,
,
i>
J^f
(Imper.
(Perf. VIII.
h)
of
"p "to
yU
e.g.
and
of the
^1);
jj*A^
form takes the
II.
last radical is
hamza
Z,^
o'..
noun
II.
of
f^).
Peculiar forms of certain special
Hamzated verbs:
a)
The verbs jeM
jft
"to eat" drop the first radical in the Imperative
form
"to
I.
etc.
y>
"command",
b)
The verb S-* has
e.g.
oLlu (written also of the
),
hamza.
J*
command"
"eat".
jJL-Io)
So
take", j*\ "to
j^> "take"; Fein. ^JsJ., Dual |jj-
of the
in
in the Jussive a regular form
and a form J^Ia with omission the Imperative J** (as well as
Fern, jl, etc.
c)
the
of
quote").
The Verbal Noun
^jfis (Verbal 3.
I.
(Imper.
form xLr&f in verbs of which the 0,
of IV.);
*,&
G
*.c.
of J^l);
I.
(Verbal noun
o 'uj[
e.g.
The verb je>!
hamza
to
the
in
form assimilates
the VIII.
following
ta
$[;
e.g.
Imperf.
Indie.
4. is
Conjugation of verb, the
hamza: vjJ! "to get
accustomed
to".
first
radical of which
First Part.
182
Perf. at
Juss.
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
gj
Ij
^&J U
\
Jji
Jjfe
Jilff
\
.
>
o
- J!
.
Q-J L>
--
uwb
sJJo
sjJIi"
etc.
etc.
etc.
vail
etc.
Imperative o-
^A! G
^Lt
Part. Passive
etc. -
*
Imperf. Indie,
.*
j3l
>
"to
hope
:
t
,-
o^JU >->
f.
Passive Perf. u>Jl
J**J
^
O.
Part. Active
lib! "*
O
Jf.
Imperf. Indie. J^>b
"to quote": Imperf. Indie.
^^t
ySu
,
Imper.
jt
Derived Forms. '
Indie. . ~-S.
II.
m.
v_^S
t
JJT
oS
t~e>
oaJ^J
JjC
v
^
I
JjT
IV.
V.
---
-,
v^Jlj-
V_jjLAJ
^
JJB
O_Si
t
Imper. J^l.
Noun. O
IL*
133
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
S
**
1"P-
^ N'
rt
JCJ
VI. VII.
P
in
Wanting waw, ya,
ra,
-
.>
all verbs beginning with hamza lam, nun. O o , O .1) --
VIII.
IX. Wanting.
X.
Vocabulary,
(to appear, IV. 1
to
show.
to
take
be friend-
III. to
III.
to
VIII.
to
take,
blame, for
oneself.
J {
ly with. III. to
( }
be
wealth, possessions. inti-
bread.
mate with. to
be
beggar.
true, safe,
IV. to believe (in
to be satisfied.
religious
sense). | (
properly
/^U
to hope,
V. to ob-
serve (with I
^
of
thing.
(plur.
food.
angel.
I
apostle.
resurrection.
bedouin o,,
^^ religion.
the J i
of day judgment.
sick,
to
ill.
make an
sion, III.
to travel.
(adjective).
(sound plur.) movement.
impres-
V. to be
in-
fluenced, affected.
First Part.
134
(Moslem
creed.)
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
*L'
A^Jj'J
(JJUI
,..}
J^J
135
JJI1
IAP
(
a dv. accus. "in order to")
>
O
>
-
-
o->
,.
I
u^j* vJU
| sis.
>
i
o
-
*
J
S
>ox>
5
vi
First
136
Part,
Exercise 46.
the money? No, we have not take it now. Eat and drink Take the reward of your until thou art satisfied. I work. They both seated themselves to eat. He hopes that think that 1 am affected by the heat. his father will command us to appear (that we appear).
Have you taken taken it, but we will
- Excuse us
for our lateness. We came forward permission of the Commander of the Faithful to come in to him, and he allowed us that. Truly this book is. the work (editing) of the sheikh Mohammed. - Do not blame us. Eat with us. We discipline The discipline of the lazy scholars the lazy scholars. We do not blame (with is the duty of the teacher. We spoke pleasantly to him us is lack of blaming). He took (we were friendly with him in speech). (VIII.) a house.
to ask
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
is
1. Conjugation of verb the second radical of which hamza.
Si Perf.
Si
"to ask".
Imperf. Indie.
ill!
written (also jllu)
Subj.
jLlj (J^
to oJU
etc.
oL*o
oLwj
M
Jui
etc.
etc.
Twenty -fifth Lesson.
187
Jussive.
etc.
etc.
Imperative. (also
written
jll
etc.
Part. Act.
etc.
JJLl -
Part.
Pass.
or
,
(also
3j)_j
written
^^-^
or
Passive Perf. J^l, Imperf. Indie. JLLji (also written
Example Imperf.
of the form Joe: vjjj"'to be cast
Indie.
vjIXj
(also
V
down
written
Imper.
Example of
the form
J.J6:
Imperf. Indie.
Imper.
J^
"to be brave".
First Part.
138
Derived Forms. Perf.
Imperf
Part. Act. Part. Pass.
Indie. Imper.
,,
ju
n.
IV.
v.
VI. ,,o,
u,o
VII. OLvAJt ^
JuLw.*^
JwLwJ!_^
Jjdf
*-^ri
, G
VIII.
G
o
Gg,o,
>
(jLtM^/4
,
lxLo
,vxxJuJt
(from 1^ "to bind up a
,
^ JUCvWwiX
,
,
wound"
as this form of
3L1 does not occur). IX. does not occur.
Verbal Noun. II.
m.
!Uls > ii
uJ
IV.
5HlS
v. 3lli-
Example of
2.
lyi
verb,
VI.
StLJ
VIII.
!tixh I
vii. StLJi
whose third radical
Imperf.
Iixiic.
Subj.
^
x. is
hamza:
"to read".
Perf.
^
Juss.
,,
i--o,
f.e*
y
i/^
5yM
5y^
t,o,
,&,
i-o,
lytt
!yu
!_JG
I, o.
139
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
etc.
etc.
Subj;
Juss.
etc.
etc.
Imperative 8
-0
Part. Active
iysl
j.yjt
Pass. Perf.
etc.
Part. Passive
^yj
Imperf. Indie.
dJyi Conjugation of Imperf.:
UP
-
^Is s.yli
lyL'
etc.
verbs
which
take
kasra
"to be healthy", Imperf. Indie.
in
the
^^5, Impe-
rative
Conjugation of verbs of the form Joe: Perf.
Imperf. Indie.
^^
"to sin".
Imper.
etc.
etc.
etc.
First Part.
140
of verbs
Conjugation be slow"
of the form
jJis:
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
yLi "to
Imper.
o.
,
.i,.
i.
o^ku
_?rv"
etc.
etc.
etc.
Derived Forms. Perf. Imperf. Indie.
*JM *
s-
c
9
:
-
to,
!yil
L5j*^
L5j*'
L5j**
Es_
*.*-IJixj
i--
9~--.>
V.
lyij
E - --
*-
o,
^j^*
9
9
tjijl
VIII. IJXSJ
IX. Does not occur. -0-0
X.
^
&
0-0.
^j Verbal Noun.
II.
III.
Jiys
?LL^
IV.
syj
VI.
3JL&
VIII.
* V.
VII.
sfjut
- '
is--
:.:.
-o
r>
9-0,
^
tyij *'
:.--
* -o-
E-,o
9
o
f
s-
'
S-oS
IV.
r
V-'
"i
r.'
-.
VII.
Part. Act. Part. Pass.
Imper. 2
r
n
X.
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
141
First Part.
142
Exercise 47
2T
OU
it
L'4?
L^
ill*
i
Li
j^
i Joe) whose second radical
waw_or
ya.
Defective verbs djoSij is_waw or ya^ C.
A.
Verbs
Jots)
whose third
radical
Assimilated Verbs.
Verbs whose
I.
2.
first
or ya.
whose
first
radical
radical
first
is
is
3
.
waw have
the
following peculiarities": a)
in
Those that take kasra injhe Imperf.
the Imperf. and Imper.
Imperf. J^aj
Imper. J^o.
in the Imperf.
e.g.
Many
lose their
from
j^5
also
that take
have the same peculiarity
"to arrive"
e.g.
fatha
First
144
Part.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
Imper.
"to place, put".
*j
jto
^,
"to be wide"
.*j
*
gl
"'to fall".
-^j.
b)
kasra
from (for
it
If is
jc>-31
is lost in
the \vaw
the Active
is
so from
jo>
e.g.:
vowelless
changed into a ya
their,
love", Imperf. Indie. o_^j.
*X>j
.,
is
retained,
"to find", Imperf.
and preceded by
e.g. j4=T.I (for
the Verbal
Noun
a.
Jo^j[) Imper. IV.
is
Twenty-sixth Lesson.
Vowelless
waw
(for Jc>-jj)
damma
preceded by
cf.
145
becomes u
e.g.
Less. 27.
In the VIII. form the followiDgrj^ e.g.
waw
the
c)
assimilated to
is
J*oj "to join" VIII. JyaSJ, Imperf. Indie. II.
3.
Verbs whose
These Verbs retain
_**j
(j*Ju
"to be
ya
is
into a
Indie. IV.
In the
J%j
4.
is
(for
^Uj
,,
,,
e.g.
^c.
(see Less. 25).
damma,
"to be awake",
JOJL
e.g.
~-o.
vowelless and follows
waw
VIII.
following td e.g.
radical
ya in the Imperfect
Imperf. Indie.
"to despair",
If the
changed
easy'.',
first
their
it
Imperf.
-a&u).
form the ya
J^j
VIII.
is
the
assimilated to
%
u
Conjugation of the verb whose
first
radical
is
jyo3 "to arrive, join". Perf.
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
etc.
etc.
etc. Arabic Grammar.
is
Juss.
etc. 10
.
first Part.
146
Imperative O
Part, Act. G
Juo
Part. Pass.
etc.
O
Verbal
G
o -
Noun J^3
j^
Pass. Perf.
An example
..>
0.
or Jyaj or iXo
Imperf. Indie.
which
of those verbs,
in the Imperfect is J^>.. "to
retain their
3
be afraid", Imperf. Indie.
Imper. J^rj. Derived Forms.
Part. Act.
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.
,-
>
o,,
- ~>
-
>
Part. Pass. G s - >
*o
II.
III.
jy^fj
--o -IV. V.
VI.
VII.
:
VIII.
IX. *
X.
jsx
^
Does not occur. .,
O
,
J^O^A**
0,0-
^V^fl^iUMj
O
0,0
G
.J-O^XAW?
0,OJ
JwO_jJC**v9
0,0,
O
>
J*9^C*w
Verbal Nouu. II.
juyoji'
IH. Jll^ or iUux"
IV.
3LL|
VI. J^tji' VIII.
V. 3-^3 VK. Sliyj
X.
3^
Twenty-sixth Lesson. 5.
147
Conjugation of the verbs, whose
first
radical
is
^
;
"to be dry".
J^J
Irnperf. Indie.
Perf.
Subj.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Imperative
.
Part. Act.
Part. Pass.
etc.
Verbal
Noun U *AJ
Pass. Perf.
Imperf. Indie.
,jj
Derived Forms. Perf. Iinperf. Indie. Iniper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
III. -
-oS
>
>
o
oS
O
V. 9-
VI.
,,j
First Part.
148
Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
vii.
IX. Does not occur.
Verbal Noun. 7
H.
IV.
i
,^Uil
J
VI.
VIII.
vn.
v.
Vocabulary.
to complete.
II.
to-
time
remain, stand still, IV. to stay,
refrain
j j
from (with >***
^),
I.
to learn,
ascertain
(with
-
VIII. to
be
dis-
turbed, excited.
hearing.
IV. to conduct, bring. to be necessary,
to
&
incumbent (with
throne.
eat,
lay down, to allow (only
let,
in
Imperf.
Imper.).
anger,
and body.
Exercise 49.
fi
4521
First Pare.
150
1
^^i
ffi
1^3? (j|3
U
(j-j*
L3&
Jj
(in
regard to
bo
b
;i
^
.
.
.
.)
u
(j^is; k.
ul
*,*>r
^~
v
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
151
Exercise 50.
You have
Hast sought us and not found us. I have down on the seat? not yet laid them down, but I will lay them down Let Lay them down immediately. shortly. If God will, you will arrive at us stay with you.
thou
laid
these books
-
(it) Cairo in (the) comfort.
We Ho
long ago (since a time).
have already arrived from the bear, he
fled
fell into the cistern. friends, girl, do not fall. This dwelling lead us to the sheikh of the tribe. Stand still and do not will be very suitable for us.
The entrance
move.
to (jUc) the
Sultan was
made
It is our duty to bring you to the possible for us. Many .marvels are found prince (the bringing you to). I shall describe it to thee in this letter. in Egypt.
Your fallen
letter
has not reached
into great
distress.
(j,!
oj
God
us.
will
your affairs, for He fety is the Helper have agreed that you shall stay with us
We
have
help (^^* (Part.).
II)
We
for a long time
(sjji Accus.).
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
B.
is
Hollow Verbs.
1. Hollow Verbs i.e. those, whose second radical j or ^"observe the following rules!
First Part.
152
^
or
A. If the
vowelless and the third radical
is
then the 3 or ^js dropped to prevent ajsojvowelless, 13, 3) e.g. the meeting of two vowgTesTIettirs. (Intro.
ia
From below, B, is
Ji (for
dropped and
From
becomes
it
,Jb; so
'o) the Jussive
eC (for
From sJJ> Imper.
the Jussive should be (.yb (see are vowelless, the 3 r
^)
but as the 3 and
1),
J^)
(for
Imper. ^3.
is *.J,
the Jussive
the Imper. is
s^k
1
.,
j.
the
^>.
third radical, by conjugation, receives a ud voweJ, no elision takes place e.g. 2 Sing. Fein. Juss. If the
.Ji^iS, Plur.
Masc. Imper. \jAj*.
So also the alif, when it takes the place .of ^ or ^, is dropped, whenever the third radical is vowelless
by conjugation
e.g.
From IV. jjsf
(for j^Sl) is
formed 2 nd Sing. Masc.
ie*ti.
B. If the 3 or ^5
is
vowelled, the following rules
are observeHl
the ~or L 9
1} If
of the
,
vowelless;
aw
From j.15
radical is voweliess, then the vowel, given to It. the^or g thus becoming then changed to~ a &uclj),
From ck> (= ?.
for
Imperf. Indie.
v_3^i-),
^MJ
Imperf. Indie.
(for
*H).
vJL?.
(for
153
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
So
also
from
for
Indie. IV. for pjsf); Imperf.
1^1
Part. Act. IV.
^b); IV.
are formed Perf. IV. J&
(= ^s)
jLlS
^
(for
^Uu
^JU
^aJ
(for
for
'^
(for ^Jib
for
Part. Pass.
^U);
~
for
rjju).
2) If the first radical is vowelled.
Then if am, awu,
a) a) (twa,
Perf.
X
the
third
radical
^ becomes j, ^^> becomes
I.
becomes JLb, J**P becomes
3^i>
also
is
become
aya, ayi, ay u
a,
vowelled,
e.g.
^
\Jte>,
3 r.
Form
Perf. 4y*J!
becomes 3lJu! and Imperf. Indie, oyi^j becomes
^lilj.
wwi,
P)
becomes
e.g. Perf.
-&*?. b)
place
st
VIII.
rules a)
^ys^ -*g^\
and
&j
apply also to the VIII. form
(3)
becomes
becomes
If the third
awa becomes
Sing. Perf. to,,
o-e
p) tl
I.
lj
^|,
Imperf. ~j*&:. becomes
jLx*|.
radical
is
vowclless, elision takes
and
a) 1
The
Perf.
Perf.
Pass.
e.g.
z,
.&o becomes ^.oo.
J^3,
Note.
become
wy*
^^
u,
>(,
becomes
awl,
co
jo, o'
uwi and uyi becomej;
becomes vils
aya,
ayi
become
becomes &**, v^o>>
f,
e.g.
becomes
it,
becomes
st e.g. 1
v
Sing. Perf. Pass.
OAAO becomes
2. I^e_Verbal Nouns of IV. and X. drop the and add fa after the third radical; e.g.
From
the Verbal j.15?
it is
Noun
from
is Kxls'^j
I.
First Part.
154
In the Participle Active of the
3.
form the G""^
I.
>
c^v
(for
(for
U
o
>
155
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
Conjugation of
j.15
(=
"to stand": j.^5)
Perfect.
Sing.
Dual
jte
0--
Plural
Uli
I_^l5
^0>
-
..
Uxls
(
..*S
Imperfect. Indie. q.
o.
oin^r.
, m.
3f
.'.-
.'.-
'Jijl
g
g in.
f.
"i^.QJ
*
i*-'^
'
n ^5.
Juss.
...'
."^
*
,,
Subj. -
'
Q
;,
} *
J
(i
>*
First Part.
156
Indie. Plur.
2.
in.
2.
Juss.
Subj.
O j*j&
^
f.
:
r>
1.
Imperative S. 2. 2.
D.
m.
^3
^5
f.
2.
PI. 2. 2-
Part. Act.
^15 Part. Pass,
Uj5
m.
rjiU
|_^5
^
o^ Passive.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
Subj.
UB >
,lu ,
- >
JL ,
JG e>
, ^
AJlj j,.ftJ
etc.
etc.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
Derived Forms. Perf.
III.
$ .-
IV.
r
l5i
Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part Act. Part. Pass
157
Twenty-seventh Lesson. Perf. Imperf. Indie. -a-**--,
V.
Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass. O OS--; , os--
*Jij
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
^j~~*
^%-*4
--,&
X.
>
LAJUkw!
0-0
-0>
'J
AJt/Lwt
,jjiX^*)U
wanting.
o^**ws
3vj>^*t
.0-
^iX&X^-./O
6 _
- .
O
...
Verbal Noun.
,s
V.
K^'JU
VI.
VJ5[
VII.
II.
III.
IV.
5.
!j
VIII.
IX.
^183
X.
^LxiJi
Conjugation of the form J*s.
JU> Perf.
(for
s_^)
"to fear"
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
old?.
oli:
'
o'ws:
-
.
1
s
ol1 etc.
etc.
etc.
Juss.
First Part.
158
Imperative 6
Part. Act.
Part. Pass.
etc.
Passive.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
Subj.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
etc. etc.
Conjugation of the form 51 b (for
Perf.
"to be long".
Jb)
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
e*c
e t.
e te.
vl^Jlb etc.
6.
J***:
-
Imper.
etc.
Conjugation of verb, whose middle radical
JLO
(for 'jLa)
"to
is
c
become" Perfect.
Sing. 3. m. 3.
f.
Ju>
0j U ^ O
,,
2.
m.
2.
f.
1.
o
OjA9
Dual
|Jli
6^li ^
O
Plural
!^U>
Q^> o
J r,
159
Twenty- seventh Lesson.
Imperfect. Indie.
Siug. 3.
,1
Subj.
Juss.
m.
3.
f.
2.
m.
2.
f.
I-
Dual
3.
m.
3,
f.
2.
Plur.
.
g
^
1^
3. rr
3.
f.
o
tv.
2.
f.
1-
Imperative
Part. Act.
Part. Pass.
t^
First Part.
160
Passive. Perf.
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
etc.
etc.
etc.
Juss.
etc.
Derived Forms. Perf.
IV.
vV.
Iraperf. Indie.
Irqper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
}
-*-i wkXU
*-:. ^A=L>
*-:.-
^ClAJ
-"
VI. VII.
ji^[
vin. JiLit (see Less. 21, S -0
IX. ijaot
i
4 a) ,0,
O
u
8-0,
,0
^
13
\J**!
1
-?'
u13*^*
wanting.
Verbal Noun. II.
UJ
III.
IV.
V.
!IJJ
VIII.
1^
VI.
:
IX.
gtUI ^ *
VII.
*JuL
" *l^Jj J t
X.
^' gjLkll S
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
161
Conjugation of the form Joe; ujU> (for vJyjS ) "to fear". 1
Perf.
Imperf. Indie.
Subj.
Juss.
Imper.
etc.
162
First Part.
First
164 -
f
>ji
i
{ I
pli
o
be absent,
to
e)
(, V1J7 '
Part.
(5
-
>oo eggs
(collective).
go away.
=
*_^ government.
to sleep.
^1)
to .^Lb (^5)
protection.
fly.
Exercise 51.
^
eg
c^o!
-
oS
^j!
o
-
-
Q,.,
M" sX5
o
oJi
,
cr
(Optative) jlif
|Jo5
(Intro.
yaxi
U
lllu
9)
ioJT
Twenty -seventh Lesson.
"as regards"
.
.
.,)
Cs
^llj
i[ pjJ&T
jNjlo!
L
fSA>
54-/! (Less. 21,
^
^
(what .... of insult
5,-b) oloL'
S&S\
(see Less. 42, 2, f
ZJ
(Proverb) ^J,\J>
165
x
= what insult) KJ
,*
'
s
("which the lions
jdLi
!^>
l
jjJ!3
fear", see Less.
^
C
^jlij
31,4) WL^J
(Less. 21, 5, a)
j'S
.
First Part.
166
oojf
"as regards"...)
i
uLOOLsl
^Ja
k
j*j*
-S
o^
j
v_
(
see Less
'
42) 2)
-
^
U
(Optative) Ji-ou
'S
\
BoU
&|
(Proverb)
(Less. 34, 6)
,
*^
*
Titf.hr
f +
-
SOlSt
s
*->
*E
-.^
dULLP
'tii'Jol
c^
* ^
NxSb
^
BJu33
Exercise 52.
Rise in
this
O
city
come upon misfortune.
girl,
and
let
us.
us
sit.
A
->
We
wish to stay
misfortune has were afflicted by (\J) a great
half a year.
You O woman,
great
go away and do not return.
What have you said? We said, this is not Do not say this. Dost thou wish O girl,
fitting.
that I
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
167
It was said, the king had say to thee the truth? He did not die and will live long. Truly I wished to we yearn to see you (to your seeing). Go visit you, but was not able to (that). my son, in the protection of God. The merchant, who lives
died.
in Cairo will visit us.
(Part, of
pli?)
God may
lengthen your
sleep that
he was
and drink and
life.
We
wish that
fancied in
(the)
We
flying.
rest.
He
They
flew from joy. handed us the coffee
Eat and
He wished handing of the coffee we rested. You have he was not able. Did you spend made us giddy with your speech. the night in Damascus? No, we did not spend the The government appointed him night in that city, The coward Trust in God and fear not. governor. after the
to sell these eggs, but
'
does not attain the reward.
(fearing)
question.
I
have already repeated
Repeat your
He
it.
will
This stuff (jiUS) will not last. approve our opinion. (The) obedience (Verbal Noun of "obey") is our duty.
Twenty-eighth Lesson
Defective Verbs.
C.
1.
The
Defective verbs, which have ^ or
^ as
third
radical are conjugated according to the following rules
A. If the ^ or l5
is
It is dropped, when nothing 1_. end, as in the Jussive and Imper. e.g.
From U3 (= Juss.
xj,
Imper.
is
added
_^>) "to call": Imperf. Indie, >!.
:
vowelless: at the
Part.
*'irst
168
From Juss.
Imperf. Indie.
^Imper.p!.
From ,
throw":
"to
(= ^;)
-xj
Imper.
meet":
"to
"j&
Imperf.
Indie.
Juss. ^^fiJLi.
^K.
So also in the
II.
form (and other Derived forms):
forms Imperf. Indie. L^vXj, Juss. cjo, Imper.
The Pronoun
is
added as &xOl
him".
at the end:
If there is
a)
aw becomes au; ay becomes
Masc. Perf. b)
I.
Uo
of
I.
1.
When If the
is
uiv
r,
is
^>j
"to be noble"
B.
o^*x>; of
is
iw and iy become
Masc. Perf. 3y*
^If the second radical is vowelled, and no addition at the end: a) awa and ay a become a, this a being written alif when it is derived from atpq," with ya when a) there is
^
IPs
3 ra
derived Jrom__a?/: e.g is
1*3, of
fyjiwa Pass.
unchanged. unchanged.
^
is
become^ Perf.
I.
So in
iSing.^Masc.
.Perf. 1.
of
^J.
iya, iya >
remains; e
becomes
Imperf.
Subj.
g. >
I.
^^
becomes remains
remains '^^ -
169
Twenty-eighth Lesson. >
*
*t] uwa remains; does not occur).
e.g. 5J*,
mow becomes
8)
- )
.*
u\
x
Imperf. Subj. _^x.j, (uya Ihdic.
Imperf.
e.g.
O
I.
_^Xj
becomes _j&xi, (uyu does not occur). s]
iyit
becomes
g;
Imperf. Indie.
e.g.
^^ becomes
I.
does not occur). ^yy', (iwu
awu and ayw become a (always
C)
J-'O-'
\5); e -g- Imperf. Indie.
^^
I.
^o^
written with O
>.,&.*
.*
^fo^\ ^j. (from
^^
becomes
"to pasture")
*
becomes
The same changes wbereTIowever
c
^to becomes
rule 3); e.g. III.
becomes b) a)
lJu
take place in the Derived forms, 9 alwajsjakes the place of ^ (see below
There
is
The
and
,
(J=|3;
an addition t becomes Leo.
2 nd Sing. f follows (as in Plur. Masc. Fein. Imperf. and Imper.) .the following changes take placej_ a,wfi and aya become au. and so aivuna and ayana P)
If M or
become auna: t^co; 3
rd
;
e.g.
3 rd Plur. Masc. Perf.
Plur. Masc. Imperf.
becomes
';
I.
I.
l^^to becomes
\^o^ becomes
lsL'
becomes
j^a,
L.
and
First Part.
170
MC#,
and
iyn
become u and so twang and
urni
iyana become ana;
3 rd Plur. Masc.
e.g.
j^jj becomes \j&\ 3 J
\jjtoj-,
Masc. Imperf.
and ~
tiwl
ay?
become
becomes
^j^kxj'
o
^.
e.g.
o ^jj. >
^A^vXj';
I.
O ^
Juss. jjj^cJG
becomes
o*
-
-
becomes
2 nd Sing. Fern. Imperf.
Q *
+
j~O~~^~
i;
1^J
becomes l^l; 3rd Plur.
j^
becomes
O j**j4
I.
and Q-^-J becomes ^.yy.
becomes 7)
nd oi; e.g. 2 Sing. Fern. Imperf.
becomes
oy?
,jliij;
When
I.
Imper. Sing. Fein. L^kJ! becomes ^aJt.
o of
the
the 3 rd Sing. Fern. Perf. is added,
awa and aya
are first changed to a and then, to prevent the meeting of two vowelless letters (see Intro.
the
13, 3), ^the alif is
dropped;
o_j*o becomes
e.g.
oUo
then u>^cO;
^yJ becomes oUj then u>^. of the Dual is (irregularly) formed by Fem. The^
analogy from the Sing.:
The
'u^J,
changes into
iya],
Dual
Note. The ^5 as sign of ti into
\
Intro.
whenever a suffix 6, Note 3). 2.
Jo.
following forms are regular i-^J-^j (since iwa
ia
added
at the
;
e.g.
end of a word
is
changed
"he threw him", (see ^U^
the Active Participle iwun and iyun are G 6 becomes into in\ e.g. _^c!o becomes c!o; ,c*5.
In
changed
These forms are declined
like
(jaii
in Less.
-6,
3.
Singular.
Nom. Gen. become
z.
with the Article ^tSJ! (iww and pto;
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
171
Accus. Uck>; with the Article o1>
Siog. maec.
Dual lcoi
e
Plur. masc.
^ fem.
.
fern.
^o! Part.
Sing.
nom. masc.
cfj
Active.
(with Art.
^ijJi)
accus.
gen.
Dual.
jp|.
nom.
masc.
J
gen. accus. Plur.
notn.
gen. accus.
^
Part. Pass.
fem.
fem.
iixc
First Part.
174
Passive Perfect, Sing.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
^o
Dual
Pass. Imperf. Tndic. Sing.
.2.
Dual
2.
fern.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
3.
masc.
,,
3.
fern.
,,
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
1.
Siibj.
masc.
2.
Plur.
U&j
^UcjsJ
^J^'
Plur.
Juss.
175
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
p)
Of
^o}
the form Jjti:
"'to
be pleased". Perfect.
Sing.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
I-
^i>*
Dual
Sing. 3. masc. 3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2. fern.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
Plur.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
1.
Plur.
1^,
_..^ Imperf. Tndic.
Dual
L^
Subj.
Juss.
Inrst Part.
176
Imperative.
Dual
Sing, raasc. \jo^ fern.
fern.
J^t tl
Part. Act.
Pass. Perf.
Plur. masc.
L*>J
'^o}
Part. Pass,
^o) Imperf.
(s.
Verbs of the form
Jo*i (as
SjM
Indie.
"to be noble") are rare,
b) Conjugation of verbs whose third radical
Of
a)
^J*}
the form
is
^:
jjli;
"to throw". Perfect.
Sing. 3. masc. 3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
^*J
Dual
vi^
U**
Lx^
Plur.
\^ ^AJ
1.
Imperf. Indie. Sing.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
1.
Subj.
Juss.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
Imperf. Indie.
Dual
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
,,
2.
Plur.
3.
masc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
"
*
1
Juss.
Subj.
c*V Imperative.
Sing. masc.
Dual
^t
Plur. masc.
ll^t
fern,
fern.
Verbal
Noun
Part. Act.
r
Pass. Perf.
Part. Pass.
^^
Imperf. Indie.
^^
etc.
etc.
,3)
Of the form >S:
_1 "to meet" Arabic Gretnmar.
is
conjugated
like
^
J4
==
First Part.
173
c)
Conjugation of the Derived forms of
all
Defective
verbs. Perf. II.
JU
in.
&i
IV.
Jt
V.
J&
vi.
J.ii
VII.
J&[
VIII.
IX.
L
Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.
jiS Wanting.
Verbal Noun.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
V. to breakfast.
j:
stretch, V.
'"
to
j>
I
stretch
to
*
oneself,
179
butter.
(dried dates (collective).
1
rest.
I
tobacco.
V.
take supper,
to
to ;
L-) wixt5)
(plur.
and VIII.
1.
to
(suffici-
ently).
l
person
G.,..
r^
last.
to call, to pray for, wish (with J of
be
1
watered
go away, Part.
Act. past,
herbs.
of
,
rain.
thing) VIII. (see Less. 21, 5, b) to to X. claim,
G
=
time.
^Uj.
winter.
summon. G
remain.
to
rest, f
1
^jL.
remainder. G
(pi.
-
'PJ&-
Ojxis)
iio
section,
season.
to pasture, feed on.
and III. to meet, IV. to throw, VI.
1.
j'
I
I
and VIII. to meet one another. IV. to give (with two accus.), VI. to give one another.
sheep
O *lf) seller.
VIII. to honour.
,,
-
,=
1
(plur.
(collective).
to
***" \
1x5*
approach.
((literally
"to
let
live") to greet.
to bend. o *
-
iXw to complain of -ASS
brevity. |
j
to
be sufficient for, to reward.
III.
collecting.
180
First Part.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
181
Exercise 53.
3J3T
UL
S&.
j>
tsi^J
i
jti'
(Proverb) * *
- --o-o
-
cJ
C
ijJ
(for
i-Su
o
o
Jall'd*
1X^(5
j
Lo^.
l.
olf
b3
Ub
isJo
(Less. 31, 4)
^i
(Less. 34, 6)
Ljf (Less. 44,
&J
^M
5)
JU
*XCJOL*O
First Part.
182
=>
LM
Lie
i
a s pledge) \JjS
i.
T (Optative:
J Is
(
"May God pardon",
iJT
toJ>
^-00,0
1*1*^
*5j
Less. 30, 6)
(joo
a ---
t>3^
iJJJT
(Proverb)
(Less. 34, 7)
oojf U
xJiilJL
,U
J?
i |
j
;
uJ
il
U
(Proverb)
jl;
^'
u
.
-
188
Twenty -eighth Lesson.
b
it
jjT\
(Koran, Sura
1.)
Q
vi^fti
.LuJ?
.^-JiiLIf
(Proverb)
Iwij,
.(Jfi^
^A
Exercise 54.
When was (Part, Pass.)
house built?
this
in the lime
)
(
It
was
built
of the last Sultan.
We beg your pardon I have read your (we hope from you the excuse). Do not forget what I have said to thee O letter. I have not forgotten it O my master. Go boy! When will the time of slowly (with slowness). Why
did you weep
girls?
w
our meeting be? necessary for
(is
due
(right).
We us).
shall give
you what we ought
You have
Remain with
us.
not given us our I heard a crier
(Part. Act. III. of |jo) crying (he cries)
The
with a loud voice.
We weeping). did not happen.
girl
wept
in the
market
bitterly (a bitter
What you wanted fainting. What you have said is sufficient
fell
me. Whither art thou going? Wast thou I met a dog in content with what I said to thee? the street. What (how) is this called in Arabic? I went from the house to meet them (to their meeting). Do not be anxious about this man. Spare me (make me remain II). -*- Hast thou watered the horses? We have already breakfasted and, if God will, we shall shortly take supper. Truly, the merchants buy and sell in the market. Buy what is necessary for us. If God will, we shall meet in the current for
(flowing)
month.
First Part.
J84
Twenty-ninth Lesson. Doubly weak Verb, The most usual of the doubly weak verbs
1.
are/
of the following three classes:
A. Those in which one radical another is a weak letter.
or
is
hamza, while
B.
Those
in
which two radicals are weak
C._
Those
m
which
weak
all
three radicals are
letters.
hamzas
letters! Hi
Verbs in which one radical another a weak letter. the first radical I) Those in which
is
2.
second s or
Imperf. Indio.
. ^ oi o
hamza, the
e.g.: vjt "to return".
>
.Tuss.
>..
>*
oj^j
-^
oj
is
hamza and
(also written
o
t,
v^
^j)
t-
i-.
!
.
,
,
^o
-
I
^jj
etc.
etc.
etc.
o_p
Imper. c
9
i,
v_j5
jjjt
Part. Active
.^
Pass. Perf.
Ju[.
!
So too the rarer verbs: vJ! (for ^i3 !) "to injure".
jT
(for
31
(for
2)
third
_j
vi,!)
jo!) "to be strong".
Those or
"to come, return".
^;
in
which the
e.g.
j^l
II.
first
"to come".
jJ? "to strengthen".
radical
is
hamza, the
185
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf. ,E
etc.
,'$s
M
etc.
j|j
(from oJ5)
|c>j?
o!
Part. Active
this
jil
is
jl
Imper. ol; Pass. Perf. j^J.
"to refuse"; Imperf. Indie,
"to pay";
II.
^j.
"to bring"; Imperf.
^ot
(with
jj'j.
same meaning); Verbal
l\oli'.
3)
Those
in
or
^\
iirst
which the second radical e.g.
,j^
is
is
hamza,
;
the IV. form). Sing. 3. masc. ,,
3.
fern.
,,
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
1.
hamza,
(Note that the e.g. ^f, "to see". dropped in the Imperf. and Imper. and in
the third ^ or L$
hamza
is
"to despair"; Imperf. Indie.
LXJi; Imper. UW M_ etc. 4) Those in 'which the second radical
.
etc.
o
Imperf. Indie,
verb the IV. form
So also
the
oil'
.
(with Article j^fl)
Indie, ^^j; Juss. o^j;
Noun
etc.
also shortened
Pass. Perf. Ji
lot"
0'*
^\^.\
sL^,.
t^l "to show'; Imperf. O
Imper. ^; Verbal
Indie.
Imperf.
>
Noun
or
21,1
Indie.
)
(for
Juss.
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
written
i -&. (also
sL
^-^'
,Jj^>. etc.
^
etc.
^
',
~,
etc.
'-
Imper.
Noun '^^^
Verbal
^>.
'?
^*>
Part. Active SL> (with Article
etc.
Pass. Perf. C
So from ?U?
(for
-,^.
* *
II.
L*tf)
5
^L^l)
C5-
form LP "to prepare";
O, o-
Noun
Verbal
NAAJ.
Conjugation of Perf.
zLfc
(for
"to wish".
sy#)
Juss.
Imperf. Indie.
a
*
.
.
-
02 Li -
o
etc.
Verbal
Perf. i(
UbJ
iUxj' etc.
Imper. Li Pass.
f
,
.
o^l
yi
Part.
Noun
Act.
^
^yfc
etc.
and '*J++A
(with Article ^tl/t).
B. 3.
Verbs
in
which two radicals are weak
letters.
Those in which the first and third radicals are weak letters. These follow the rules that govern the conjugation of the Assimilated and the Defective 1)
verbs;
e.g.
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
Perf.
&
"to guard"; Imperf. Indie.
Irnper. Masc. Sing,
Part. Act.
VIII. form
j
vj^tj
"to be complete, fulfil
Noun
Verbal
Juss.
^.
!y>.
fulfil
(a
promise)".
a vow"; Imperf. Indie, ^^j;
slLl.
'^ "to be near";
Perf.
Jij;
"to fear (God)".
'Jz^
IV. form ^j! "to
Imper.
iJ
s; Fern. Sing. $; Plur.
(with Article $$]).
^tl
Perf.
189
Iraperf. Indie, jjj; Juss. Ju;
Imper. j.
are
Those in which the second and third radicals "2) weak letters. These retain the second radical (see
Less. 27, '4,
Note
2);
e.g.
^j
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
"to narrate". Juss.
-
etc.
etc.
Part. Active
Pass. Perf. ij:..
^
(^1^1)
^^
etc.
etc.
etc.
Part. Pass.
Imperf. Indie.
"to be well watered" (of cattle, land,
Perf.
Imper.
Imperf. Indie.
Juss.
etc.
etc.
etc.).
Imper.
etc.
first Part.
190
In the same way are conjugated ^5^, "to be worth": 1
[f^i
"to be strong'
of
Conjugation
written
also
^p.
^_=>
(for
to live".
Imperf. Indie
Perf.
form
II.
"to
u>-
let
live,
greet";
Verbal Noun
contracted iU^'.
X. form llsr^t "to spare
alive";
be ashamed" generally written with Imperf. Indie.
in the sense "to
one^:
Perf.
-^uJ;
weak
letters.
^?Uo. C.
4.
Verbs in which
The only verb use _Jj;
is
three radicals are
of this class,
"to seek refuge";
^i
Imper.
all
which
in
is
Imperf. Indie, ^jj; Juss.
Part. Act. ^i (with Article ^c.bH).
_^jS;
Sc
^ '*
^.\ "to show hospitality meaning).
common
to'";
IV. form
II.
form
^~|
(witli
same
Vocabulary.
school. i
| I
to
swear,
make
to
X. to swear
(by v)or
v_> s\.>-
"to to
(literallv
come
r.
with"),
(with bring accus. of person).
^^ ]
o^ij>
or
^J|^) need, affair.
Twenty-ninth Leeson.
U-
,..!
191
E'U&
.J
First Part.
192
Lij
J
U,
O
b'
i
.(Less.
47, 8)
U
^j
Exercise 56.
Have you
seen
not see you come. refused to see me.
us come (we come)? We did I wished to see him, but he You have come to us at a most
seasonable time (the most blessed
uS^ji
of times).
In the coining week I will show you the goods I have We shall bring you (what is with me of goods). what you wish. After the greeting we inform you
-
that we have come to Q>\) Constantinople. The physician promised me that he would see me every The master saw that I was ashamed (saw me day. I was ashamed). Show me the books thou hast (what is with thee of books).
193
Thirtieth Lesson.
Thirtieth Lesson.
Verbs.
Quadriiiteral 3 ~>
1.
The
O
Quadriiiteral verb
o
is
of the form Jd*s e.g.
"to translate".
Imperf. Indie.
Perf.
Juss.
Imper.
etc.
5
o *
>
*>J^
Part. Active
Verbal
etc.
etc.
etc.
Part. Pass.
Noun
Pass. Perf.
^>^'
Imperf. Indie.
^
Derived Forms. a) JJLxL', 'to
e.g.
from ^LL~"to appoint Sultan"
become Sultan". Imperf. Indie.
^LjUJo
Imper.
Part. Active
.JaLtiJLt
Verbal
b) Jlii!, e.g.
Imperf. Indie.
Noun "
from
Ui>,
^Jaj
>J
to
,.J
^ e quiet
Imper.
-
Part. Active Arabic Grammar.
^ijox
Verbal
Noun O
First Part.
194
There are
numerous onomatopoetic
verbs; e.g. 3pj "to quake",
Qji
quadriliteral " to
"to tremble",
S^
howl (in mourning)", u-j*^ "to whisper" etc. The Verb Jjj. 2.
Sing. ,,
The Verb J^Ij "not
3.
mafcc.
3.
fern.
2.
masc.
2.
fern.
to be" occurs in thePerfect only:
^ ual
J*^
jplur
L~i''
-
^*Jj "to be bad".
The Verb 4. l
o
or
The Verb means ^1
^^
^L^.
followed by
"it is possible that;
the conjunction it is
to
be hoped
that; perhaps", e.g.
^o
Q^si o'
"it i?**^ "Perhaps (or
is to
hoped")
that will be".
The
other Persons of the Perfect are rare.
Verbs of Surprise or Wonder.
5. To express Surprise are employed:
or
Wonder two methods
Thirtieth Lesson.
The 3 rd
a)
Sing.
Masc.
U "what" and
preceded by
Perf.
195
of the
IV.
form
followed by the Accusative;
e.g. iJsjJ cr^- ^ "how beautiful is Zaidl" (literally "what has made Zaid beautiful"). nd b) The 2 Sing. Masc. Itnper. of the IV. form fol-
lowed by a word with the Preposition u;;
"how
beautiful
Zuidl"
is
"make
(literally
e.g.
beautiful with
Zaid").
The Optative. 6.
The Optative
is
expressed by the Perfect at the
beginning of a sentence;
e.g.
^ "may God have mercy upon him".
may be preceded by ^;
This Perfect
"may thy hands
e.g.
^|jo
c^Jli
^
not grow dry!"
Note. In speech and in popular written language the Optative is expressed by a Nominal sentence with the verb in the Imperf. e.g. ,
o-
-
>
tl-s.
JJt
u*>-jj
(pronounced allah yarhamak) "may
God have
mercy upon thee".
The Verb 7.
The Verb
Jfj
:
3f,
.
Imperf. jljl
is
used with the
negative particles U, ^ and ^J (3tj U or ^fjj' i or Jj^' jj) with another verb or with an Accus. in the sense "is still" or 'continues" e.g. (Ls>U)
v^Ju
cease to go
i.e.
(tfcfajUi)
u>
j^j
goes
(^
Jj^jlii (yfjj
itjj
^1
"he
jj)
^|^
U "Zaid did not
still".
is
jj) ty'lj
still
U "they
still
fought".
alive".
Also: Ol^f still
tO^
Jc jj*^
in this condition".
(v\jJ
p) oJ|j U "matters were
First
196
Part
The Verb JU.
The Verb
8.
oLc, Imperf.
oyu
"to return" preceded
by a negative and followed by another verb
is
used
to
express "not again", e.g.
-lj
.(^1
u
oU
)
L*
lijs*
jJ)
he did not return again".
U "we
did not return again"
Also in the Imperfect:
i
^ "do not do so again".
^ct ^ "I will not do it again Also with Accus. but without a second verb: .
jj
possible".
The Verb
The Verb
9.
e.g. ol/
o
!)
3^
Imperf. olXj expresses the English
3tf,
"almost, nearly",
(oyil
"the journey was no more
"he nearly did
ojxf oJs^
it".
"I almost died".
li}
The Verb
'tJ
r
10. The Verb ,.!j preceded by the Conjunction U "as long as" and followed by a 'verb in the Imperfect, or an Accusative is used to express "as long as, while", e.g.
"as long as
he stands".
U38
fjl v^vO U ,
>
-
|
"as
[
long
as
I stand".
*!
The Verbs ji and 11.
The Verb ji
the phrase e.g.
'
ei
UH>
U JJ U JJ
The verb
"to be
to.
little
or rare"
is
used in
(also written Uis) to express "seldom", (^JLis)
^J?,
"thou hast seldom come to us".
Imperf.
J|y
"to be long"
is
used
Thirtieth Lesson.
197
in the phrase L 5l> (also generally written LJLb) to express "not for a long time", e.g.
JUs-i >
u*JLb
&Jj]
(-* x
'
"thou hast not honoured us
for a loiig time".
The Verb
cate
L>J
o^
(^>] Js^;
^
oi^>!)
ha.ve the
jLJ "not
b
12,
known
same
as the Sisters
construction,
to be" (see
e.g.
2),
of
^
e.g.
which may
also take
\^>.
to continue, last, (see
to cease, (see
(Imperf.
_^aj) to
10).
7).
become.
to
be or do in the morning.
,->**] to
be or do in the evening.
to
(^5)
predi-
4),
to remain.
3h u not .La
Less.
(see
its
"Zaid was a merchant".
a predicate with
^
Sisters.
its
as a copula takes
Accusative
the
in
Certain other verbs
(^
and
The verb '^ used
12.
to
become.
be or do in the night.
e.g.
(or
O *.J Said
!vXS
is
not a boy.
(or
UJLl
I
remained
we
well.
are getting (become) tired.
First
198
The verbs
13.
Part.
Lo "to become",
ei-
"to- take",
and Jjo. "to make" used before another verb in the Imperfect
mean
"to begin to" e.g. '0
*
>
^O
or iL*3 or
^
LJLjLs..
we began
to
travel.
Instead of the Imperfect of the verb the preposition or v-j with the Verbal Noun may be used e.g. J
, o
\
IxXrM
we began
to travel.
Vocabulary.
Thirtieth Lesson.
199
First Part.
200
yC*ow camp.
jJas goodness, nobility.
u&
JO HI. to defend.
cup.
Exercise 57.
-
S&
) ,
I
3^>
-
jjj U
UXij' ,JkIfT
t-ot
^
LJ
'.Jb
U
^
\jl\\
.
-
U
Thirtieth
OS*
201
Lesson.
-5-
ioO
Jo
Jo
,
liub
l,
ju
y
"j^
xi
aj
UJt
5
First Part.
202
Exercise 58.
The Emir
died
May God
(Pass.
V. of
May God
mercy on him! reward
you
for
(
J5
),
may God have
prolong your days!
CTC)
The woman
usl
God curse his father! prepare the food. - They almost died from fear (Adv. Accus.). Satan pupil, translate whispers in the breasts of men. I have already translated them. these words! Good is thisboys, be quiet! boy, be quiet! Bad are these goods, girl, how beautiful she is! to
began
how
vile
thee in
they are!
Good morning (May God do
the morning good),
my
We
master.
to
still
remember your kindness. You are not (;j~J) heros. As long as we live, we shall remember your kindness. Thanks to God we are still well (sound). boys, do not do this again! We will not do it again. have not seen you for a long time. We had almost
I
drunk (y> V.) the cup of death ( y-). o continued travelling until they arrived at the
They camp of
We became (*A\) incapable of defending.
the enemies.
So long as we remained in
this city,
we
continually
saw wonders.
Thirty-first Lesson.
Relative Sentences. 1.
The
Relative
Pronoun (J^tf
Sing. Masc. (jrjJf, Fern,
which".
^t
(in
JLT^T) all
is:
cases),
"who,
203
Thirty-first Lesson.
Dual Norn. Masc.
Fein.
o udi?
^CvL't
Gen. Accus. Masc. Plural Masc. (in all cases). 55
The pronoun i^XSt
Note.
vM (therefore the
hamza
the Demonstrative 13,
is
is
compounded of the
Article
a hamzat alwasl), the particle ^ and
^cO
(see Less. 9,
1).
Notice that the common forms of the Sing. Masc. and Fein. and the Plur, Masc. are written with one lam, the other forms with two.
;
^
--
-
in Relative Other Pronouns used sentences are ~ " ~ -
2.
---
it
"he who", U "that which, what", more rarely ^\ O sg
who" and
Fern. KJ! (with following Gen.) "he
y j\
pounds
t
(
its
com-
''whosoever" and L^J? "whatsoever".
The words
^
and U
are always treated as nouns,
^5JJ! usually as an adjective but sometimes as a noun,
when '^
it
has the same meaning as
^
"he who" and
"what". 3.
The
Pronoun
Relative
is
and the following Relative Sentence
called &Ll5i.
treated in Arabic as quite independent dinate with the main sentence; e.g.
is
zL>
The man )
}C*
*jii\j
The man
^53sJ!
the
Jo^l
who sx)
^j^\
>
'
to
attached""^ indefinite,
which
I
have seen".
which the Relative sentence Js the Relative pronoun is omitted". STJ
Such a sentence
is
called a &ao; e.g. I
met a man, who had
gone out from his house. 5-
-
a-xi^
in
which
~.
>
6,
*
,.>
vxjL^ L^o iouJvo |LiJ5 Damascus are,
many
is
a
city,
marvels.
Certain constructions of the Participle Passive are to be explained as shortened Relative sentences; e.g. 5.
abo!
names
^UJ
'
;
y\xti o_^LlT the
witnesses,
whose
are mentioned below.
The
may be regarded as a shortened pronoun, the following clause as a whole depending on it; e.g. "The witnesses, who (mentioned are their names)". The following phrases of a similar nature are much used: Article here
Relative
Jl
,mi
or xJS
lojll
the above-mentioned.
205
Thirty-first Lesson.
the
man
above-mentioned.
the
woman
the
men
above-mentioned.
above-mentioned.
Vocabulary.
Mt. Hermon.
.
II.
highest, jy.
cally (^5)
0^15!)
liver,
II.
=
heart).
to soften.
hard rock.
surround. il
illff)
(used metaphori-
j IV. to deny. to embrace,
melody.
to cut in pieces
(plur.
summit.
(pL
^l=*i)
to hear.
or (i)
relative.
to be tender, soft.
giant.
obstinate.
(plur.
answer,
V. to be convinced of.
to be certain,
cold. -
fin. to be like, there. |
correspond.
tender, as,
as
(i)
to
if.
determine (on
IV. to deliver.
(pi.
misfortune. (pi.
to break.
G
oppressed.
j^t).
First
206
IV. to seize (with v-).
Part.
^
to fall.
0ii
cry.
IV. to disturb.
Go',
G
_
>
>
veil.
fresh.
2
*!) o,
ij^ "L^I
W
J^o
^
rosy.
meantime.
(
,
beautiful, shining.
.
(IV.
to
advance
u
G 'Jo!J>
tearing, carnivorous.
to a
-
-"
(to
\
languid.
G
^
IV. to rain
jjjj
pearl (collective).
o!j
(trans.).
jj Ga
provisions. (pi.
Q^Gs-) partridge.
w -
't+tS
inflaming.
ji).
-
quantity.
'
to v Ll ^^ distant. (
piercing, splitting.
1
exalted.
^Jw
G
slic.
song.
2 / JLfc
(pi.
-
supper.
o-
La!) wretched.
' ,
joj^i G'
a*
S
I
the
^'
5
)
(pi. *l>xii!)
strong.
G
jjis
delightful, agreeable. free.
itf.Li
yd
(pass.) to
to shoot,
o by>.
be
lost.
battle.
to
be intoxicated.
G /(jj)Jo\
before
-
refuge, escape.
IV. to
day
yesterday.
JjiS struggle,
JwJj brave.
jo jJ
cs ,i
*
-
.ix
VIII. to prepare.
flowing.
death,
*o blood.
to cry.
iULlo courage.
207
Thirty-first Lesson.
to carry,
induce
measure.
to
and VIII. to consider (with j).
V.
-
a flowers
-' TT
method. o,
u
to smile.
mes-
,
^
\
A.
o V.
means.
/
(coll.).
j(pl. I
ea sage.
swiftness.
Mt entrance, approach. Jo*. I
death.
iUS,
letter,
Mediterranean.
V. to enjoy note.
boneg
number.
mouth. marshal
V. to endure.
(^5)
last.
to measure.
Exercise 59.
-lj
(Less. 7, 4)
w
(vj).
prisoner.
(pi. *tjlt)
^.c. hidden, absent.
jsx
Lebanon.
~o
-
First Part,
208
JU* Jo^j yUJ? *j
il
vis
J^y^
;H^
J*
^5>>jt
*
T
vilf
.f^y
,,o,
^
PJ^c c^l^.
e?^
U|
r)>b^
fcAjj
LJ >Ui^ Jf^ jJi
.
JJI
-v*
La
i3
_-
U
JU i
^ jJT
US!
swi
^w-
Thirty-first Lesson.
209
(Less. 44, 2
*
.
J^Sf
-"
"*i
^xL'
v-juaj
,,JwO ^
-
sLAJkLAJ
~ii^
^LciXc
''
^f S? oJu
(Less.
# 44,
2
^
oB
1=^
U
L.II'
that)
Arabic Grammar.
B
8)
8)
LJ
..
iij
jiJf
j:
,
d
B
^gfA
First Part.
210
Exercise 60.
Those men, who are in the market, buy and sell. - Those women, whom we have seen in the street, This is the boy to whom we are of our family. have given the money. He, whose tongue is long, The girl, in whose hand his intelligence is small. (was) a flower, smiled.
hands were flowers. must be addressed
I
saw
in
whose
which come
to us,
girls (oJj),
All letters,
necessary that they be in This young the name of) the director of our journal. Mt. Lebanon. man, whose father, we know, is clever. from the summit of which you see the Mediterranean, After the enquity conis a very high mountain. cerning thy welfare (conditions) and the information concerning thee (thy informing) (as to) which I hope that thou art better than could be wished (thou art in excess of what is wished), I inform thee that thy friendly letter has reached me and I rejoice over (j) thy health
and thy well-being continually enjoy.
to
(it
is
which mayest thou saw soldiers, with whom (were) I inform you that I am still in the conprisoners. A dog met a dog, in whose dition, which you know. mouth was a bone. The above-mentioned Marshal is very renowned. The above-mentioned persons are (soundness), I
the owners of this house.
Thirty-second Lesson
(ojP&k
^ u>4
The Numerals.
A.
The Cardinal Numbers.
1.
The Cardinal Numbers
a)
From
110:
are as follows:
2.
,,&! o. .- /
3.
also
s.i.\ also
xj^Lii VwrittenxiJLi/
o
.A
2!
e.
.. /
also
'
)..
9.
10.
b) 11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
From 1119.
masc.
fern.
also
i.
First
212
j(also
but
*~!
Part.
frequently the
)
nounced). d)
200.
From 200 upwards.
u.
'iiu
alif
written is
not
xfu,
pro-
j
j
etc.
11000.
to
10000. jc^f
li!1
etc.
100000. *
1000000. 0.
vjjl
Zero, Nil
JJf
or
JL,
Plur.
y>
Declension of the Cardinal Numbers. 2.
The Numerals from
and
as
1 to 10 are declined: a)
Dual with Gen. Accus.
gtiull b) the others as
Singulars^
e.g.
pU
First Part.
214
Fern,
Gen.
Accus. tje>l
j^>|
i&S
i
The Numeral
o ui
declined like
is
u^ii.
*
g
ll_is indeclinable
c ,
(^~)-
12 forms Gen. Accus. 13
1_9
The Numerals 20 Plurals
yi^ ^y^H
Fern, gjs
are indeclinable.
90
are
declined
as
Sound^
e.g.
;
Nom. oij^c; Gen. Accus. The
^yi*
other Numerals are declined as follows:
Nom.
*!/>
Accus.
io-
Gen.
O S i^aJI
't&*
S
8 V*,
has two forms of the Plural: o^S
!
and
.
*t
>-?_^i,
the latter being used for "thousands" in an indefinite sense.
The Cardinal numbers from 3 to 10 are used in jhe feminine form with masculine nouns and in the masc. with fern, nouns. Formation of the Compound Numbers.
Compound numbers from 20 on
are formed by joining the units, tens and hundreds by ^. The largest number is put first, but the units are put before the tens; e.g. 3.
-
21
,o
-0
215
Thirty-second Lesson. "''
'
' '
1896
xLs
jLlo'
i
"il
I
Such an expression as eighteen hundred must be expressed by one thousand eight hundred.
compound numbers each numeral
In the
clined: e.g. Accus. -rfyZ*-*
is
dg-
etc.
.fJs^-f
Syntax of the Numerals.
The Numerals
are joined to the words they to the following rules: Qualify according " 1 and 2 are adjectives; e.g. a) The Numerals O -. 9 4_JLa ''one heart". 4.
seldom used with a noun,
is
^Lut
Dual of the noun
can be used, but when
itself
so used, the loses ^wLit
and the noun b) The are followed
nun
(see Less.
is
7,
1)
to
10 are Substantives and
z~^*i
rarely
Gen. Plur J^e.
;
e.g.
Ten women.
placed after the noun in
e.g. o
.
-
The Numerals
c)
noun
it;
final
in the
Three men.
They are more
Note. apposition to O, ,- O
its
it
follows in the Gen. Sing.
Numerals 3 by the noun
io^Ls
JLs
because the
11 to 99
are
followed by
the,
in the Accus. Sing.: e.g.
!il>.
d)
-Ac
js^-I Eleven
men. ti>, .....Ac Twenty men.
The Numerals fry in 100 on are Substantives bv Jhe noun in the Gen. Sing. e.gT
.and are followed
:
Three hundred men. thousand nights.
First Part.
216
After CompcmndJSumerals the noun follow? laws regulating its relation to the last numeral e)
the
e.g.
-,
*
c,
xix
A hundred and
A
*
men.
five
(Rule
three men. (Rule
b).
hundred and twenty-
c).
The Indefinite Numeral "some", when it is used for a number between 3 and 10, is expressed by 5.
--
the substantive
(later
.,00?
Genitive: e.g. r (>t
(iuwa?)
also'
iju^)
^cu some
followed by the-
days.
This word must not be confused with the word
Note.
60,
,, A
(jiaj,
which means, "one of some, a certain"
"Some poets"
or
"A
An_jn^efinite
e.g.
i
o.
L**xJf (joju
certain poet".
number over 10
is
expressed by the
e.g.
idx
Jl
A
hundred thousand and some
(more) souls.
Method
jure
denoting Hours and Days.
of
a) express the Hour of the day the Ordinals generally used, (see Less. 33): e.g. 6.
To
x*LJt Three
o'clock (the third hour).
At three
o'clock (in the third hour).
BuUhe Cardinal numbers are used predicatively 6 ---
/,
a
It is
three o'clock (the hour It is
Note. olcL* "11 hours".
-
;
e.g.
s
XcL*Jt
cy^
eleven o'clock.
would mean "3 hours"; X&L*
is
three).
217
Thirty-second Lesson.
"What time
Note.
it?"
is
expressed by *jjjf
is
The hours are counted
in the East
^
or
from sunset.
The times
of day '*jp the morning'', "in the b) evening". "at midday" are best expressed by the Accus.t otherwise by the preposition e.g. ;
n
mornng.
*
In the evening.
^e
Days of the week
are:
'
j^-'51
Sunday.
(Jlji)
yj
Monday.
^
'
(sLiiST)
*j&i!l
(jLji)
r
Tuesday.
(jLfrl)
r_H
Wednesday.
(^L^)
^ Thursday.
(ji-fi)
*^j Friday.
^
r
(JL^
The word
^
or
^
is
)
Saturday.
often omitted;
e.g.
Tuesday.
"The week"
is
iil^ff or
The Months 8.
The
birth year" Ji
^1*^1.
of the Christian year.
Christian year
is
called ilo^Lll xULl! "the
or ic^w*sl! xLlJl
iilljl
"the sun year".
"the Messiah year"
or
First Part.
218
The twelve Months a)
are
named:
usually in
^ July
^llJ January.
August.
yt^o February.
JJu j|
(also ^JjJ).
September.
March. April.
October.
May.
November.
June.
December.
b) usually in Syria: j,lijT
.&
j July.
January.
August
February. J|jf
March March
September, October.
j*
April.
Oas
November.
J bt May June. B.C.
is
expressed in Arabic by
oLIt US
(abbreviated ^
v)
or simple
The Months 9.
of the
Mohammedan
jrhe_ Mohammedan year
"the flight year" (abbreviated JS ^-0 >-5 uUJl "the moon year".
is
Year.
called x
after
a
date
to
#)
or
219
Thirty-second Lesson.
Dates are reckoned from 16 th July 622 A.D. thk being the day of the flight of Mohammed from Mecca to Medina.
Every year has 354 days.
The Mohammedan year 1327 began on 23 rd Jan^ 1909
AHThe yeau
of the following twelve lunar
consists
months:
or
O^j
3i
Some names
(the
month
(Month of the ^>).
months are
of these
of fasting).
often used with
special attributive; e.g.
Xt!
.M-fc^;
e tC.
Mohammedan
The Mohammedans .
1) jtfjgl
f
Os^5
ning of the month
^xJC?
^^^iT J^c
Js^nJt
two chief
festivals:
tne small festival" at the begin-
3t_^i
the great fast in the 2)
"
Feasts.
celebrate
immediately
month
after the
end of
also
called
^1*^.
"the great
festival"
"the sacrificial festival" on the 10 th of the
month A^f 3 i when
the pilgrims offer sacrifice in Mecca.
First Part.
220
Method
of indicating
Date.
indicate Date the Ordinal numbers are, After tbe^ Ordinal is put the Name of generally used.
To
10.
with or without, the word
the Month,
and
*%& jbefore jit, the numbers indicating the Year with
this
,after
or without
before them, in the Genitive:
iiJLl
5
_^i
|
^
)
a *
- 3(1-0
"
(
f
)
.
e.g.
I
)
rd
viJ'JJi
of Mul.iarram.
,.JP
UT. 1896-
J!
On
such and such a date
is
expressed by the
.Accus. or the preposition ^. Indication of Age.
11.
How
}U~
pf
old art thou? dj+s.
literally
is
expressed by:
"thy
life
how many
(is)
years?" or: -o
oo! years art
,,
o,
'iJ*M
pf thou?"
The answer
to
jo
^(
how many
"a son of
literally
such a question would be of the form:
"I
am
twenty years old".
Vocabulary. 2 ..
minute.
J^
place.
^
value
equipment. the
^
first.
^
->
c* expiration (of time).
P rice
"
to subscribe '
'
fr
eUis
'
franc.
***"
221
Thirty-second Lesson. I
(
direction,
part (of the word).
relation.
First Part.
222
/
thin cotton stuff.
(Persian)
register,
list,
)
library,
post.
address.
title, -
bookshop,
of full ((Turkish) weight or value.
Alexandria,
I
'
'
^y
narrative, play.
(pi.
travel.
north,
Batuta, an
Arabian (Ibn
tra-
veller,
who
wind,
south, east,
died 778 A.H.
=
1377 A.D.
west,
geography. -,Sa
Lu (
heighth.
Amm
1 .j**\
K
D
Bey
slumber,
Fikri(a modern Egyptian
to
spend
(time).
writer). k
VIE. the
to
be strong,
trusty
washerwoman, guide" (name of a book), -o
'^c&j
(pi.
Rifa'at Bey, (mo-
dern Egyptian
Ou5)
shirt.
(plur. Joollx)
writer).
hand-
kerchief.
O.L packing.
II.
total.
to lose (time),
be
slow (of a watch). Exercise 61.
rj,j
jjf-
223
Thirty-second Lesson.
o!cL,
L-l
r.
>
g
a
.,t
-
O;
,
xl
iu
^JL- ji
O-
o
g
jf
(
jt
(for)
W>LC
224
First Part.
I
1*0
Exercise 62.
The
earth revolves round
(^^c.)
the sun once (one
The Moslems and 6 hours. which was (and it was) in the Wilt thou honour us with a visit (thy year 622 A.D. I will visit you on Saturday. coming) on Sunday? Wilt thou come in the morning or the evening? revolution) in 365 days reckon from the Flight,
225
Thirty-third Lesson.
in the afternoon (after the midday), if God to Egypt in the year The number 332 B.C. and built the city of Alexandria. old are of its inhabitants is now 231396 souls. I
come
will
Alexander the Great came
will.
How
am
25 years old and my brother has How old not reached in age more than 9 years. Next (on the coming) Wednesday art thou O girl? The winds come to this I shall be (reach) 17. mountain (Accus.) from the four directions, the North (and) the South (and) the East and the West, and its Truly, my eye has not height is 11000 feet. I
you (two)?
four days.
We
spend about three months in the mountains,
for the
tasted
(
*lJ
[u])
slumber for
(since)
The washerwoman brought heat is strong in the city. us six shirts and two nightshirts (shirts for the sleep j.Jj)
Hasan Pasha
and twelve handkerchiefs.
died
year 1888, may God have mercy upon him! is ten minutes past nine is the time? --It
in the
What (nine
and ten minutes).
soon
be ten.
Thy watch
How much
Forty-five piastres,
my
Give
me
slow,
is
thirty,
it
will
book?
this
This
master.
will give thee twenty.
is
is
dear
and enough
I
Thirty-third Lesson.
B. 1.
The Ordinal Numbers.
The Ordinals
are generally formed O
from the '
'' ----- T
,
Cardinals according to the type J^li but with some exceptions :
J*os 1
,
fern.
.05
H ilsilh
Arabic Grammar.
the
first.
the second.
First Part.
the third.
&Jl5t
fern.
the fourth.
the
fifth.
the sixth.
the seventh.
the eighth.
the ninth.
the tenth. All the above are declined fully. to 19 are indeclinable:
The Ordinals from 11 fern.
-l^
ixc
y*S
the eleventh.
ililSJ?
the twelfth.
KSM5I
the thirteenth etc.
For the higher numbers the Cardinals only are ^ except_tE.at the^ Ordinals of the Units are_used oined to the of the Tens to express the ^Cardinals Compound Ordinals. The Article must be attached Jo eVch migteral use^ masc. and
fern.
L
the twentieth.
fern.
ijol^f the twenty-first. ^
-
i E
Xjo'iilt
the twenty-second.
twenty-third
etc.
227
Thirty- third Lesson.
masc. and
xiif
the hundredth.
fern,
fern.
the last -
Note 1. For the use of the Ordinals in the indication of Dates and the Hours of the day see the previous lesson. Note.
The Ordinals have the Sound
2.
0^1
has also a Broken Plur. J
first
parts"
parts", and
just
as
^-ic
>
has a
~s>*$\
oSoS
i
Jr*
-^
I
2.
"the middle" has Ja**!^^!
f>\$$\ "the
''tlie
last
middle parts".
for the three decades of the
The Numeral Adverbs
are
J'lor.
'-co
-oc
>
These terms are sometimes used month.
tc.
i3^l
^
The word "the
yaut
Plnral, e.g.
"firstly,
secondly, thirdly" Accus of the
by the Adverbial
expressed
Ordinals, e.g.
or
eJiS
V'*
CJ
"
fi; O
o
,
Oo
^
If
3
LiH;
/s
/i
r
^; e.g.
b^>
Note.
etc,
,
a . whole and a fraction are united, they must
be joined
5.
>
S> >
8
e.g.
Plur.
iJLi
O>
/*
i
often written, ^-
l ;
/j,
^.
The
Multiplicative adjectives "twofold, threefold" O *.) *} ^ > S*t are of the form Joiw; e.g. i^ "twofold", (
"threefold" (also
= "triangle");
"Single, simple"
"square"). 6.
The
a)
by
Distributive are expressed
"fourfold" (also
jj"
is
adjectives
"two by two"
repetition of the Cardinal
number j)r T
etc.
229
Thirty-third Lesson.
by the forms jus or JuU*;
b)
or
3 *L>.
J
^j&
e.g.
they come two
JjiLa-
by two. I
*
(ztj'j*
in twos
and
Numeral
7.
adjectives
parts of which anything
JjUi
passed by people (walking)
threes.
is
expressing
number of
the
made, are of the form ilii, e.g.
Biliteral.
'
2
- >
gi^b Triliteral, or 3 cubits long, or high.
^bj G
QuaJriliteral, or
4 cubits high, or a quatrain.
Vocabulary. S.o-
c.
$.J
doctrine, teaching.
eastern.
.w^: Zanzibar,
-"
lesson.
". >
noble
-te
-^
-
JalJ) central, middle.
/(fern. 1
So.
a
ect of
^tf. Mohammedans). (
I
x
|
-to comprise, *^ JVIII. contain.
j^ "j'
to follow,
,!$
continent,
Maghrib. .
(
-
Morocco.
H. f
*iM
Algeria.
5.
s*
cape
.*j
/^
ft
southern.
-^
",.,.. \*
'
2
1
be
western
&
tradition (in Islam).
.-
(Js
to date, (Verbal date,
Noun
=
higtory).
JILT, (
belong.
to agree, corre-
spond with.
First Part.
230 o
(pl.2Ult)noun.
rising
of the sun. to
setting
be
spoilt.
Frankish, European.
and 1
beginning.
U
s
letter, particle.
^
Spring.
tf/R
Autumn
part,
(pi.
of ,
I
the Koran).
(the Fatiha (
the
ls
t
(name of
s i rft)
noble.
.
Exercise 63.
it
(.List
3
Lj
1*
sj ^pjl
ibf
iLJL/t
Kil
it
e oL-lSl
.
231
Thirty-third Lesson. j
...,
UL*
s
-
-5
a
-
~-
pj
i*-LJ
^i
JkL
x
sUlST
Lllbri
f
JU
,ll
f
,5
iJJl
io>
Exercise 64.
The date of
letter is: Tuesday the l t July ih 1890, corresponding with the 13 Dhu'lqa'da 1307. The 114 th Sura of the noble Koran is called "The Sura
of (the) men". of
May you
this
In the (sing.)
will
first
days (Jj3*) of the month
receive (will
come
to you) a
from us and, if God will, you will send us the answer in the latter days of June. In this night I have not slept a quarter of an hour. I will return to your dwelling after three quarters of an (from the) hour. Take seven eighths of this stuff and we will letter
First
232
Part.
Two thirds of this food is eighth. servant was in the fifteenth year of his life. Yesterday I read the first (and) second and third chapters of this book, and to-morrow I shall read How old art thou? the fourth (and) fifth and sixth. - I am in the twenty-sixth year of my life, for 1 shall be twenty-six (reach the twenty-six) on the The beginning of Spring is on the 29 th January. 21 s 1 March, and the beginning of Summer on the 21 st June, and (the beginning) of Autumn on the 21 st September, and (the beginning) of Winter- on the 21 st December. The doctrine of the Relative Pronoun st is contained (is found) in the 31 Lesson of this book. There are three kinds of words in the Arabic language: firstly the Noun, (and) secondly the Verb, (and) thirdly the Particle. take the
last
spoilt
My
-
.
END OF PART
J.
233
Second Part, Lesson.
Thirty-fourth
The Noun and
its
Derivation.
,oS
o
Nouns (f*\ Plur. to their Derivation into: O
l
iUwt)
are divided
according
-
"head". Such nouns are e.g-.^J, to be found in the dictionaries under the verbal stem, a) Primitive;
although in this case the verb J*jJ "to be at the head of is derived from the noun.
a tribe, to strike on the head" b) Derivative:
Most nouns are of this Derived from Verbs. O 0, - ,, Gofrom "session, council" Jis; (J e.g. Jo3 "killing"
a)
J^
1
class,
u "great" from ^j' to be great" o , *&3 Derived from Nouns; e.g. sJu/u "a place in
from jUb- "to p)
sit";
-^
which there are lions"
from
,xj "a
lion";
"Islamic" from *ill "Islam". 2.
The most usual nouns
derived from the verb are
:
a) The Verbal Noun (,vX*ax) which properly expresses the verbal idea in the form of a noun, but sometimes has a more remote meaning and is then known as the
b)
The Active
c)
The Passive
Participle Participle
($&\
(lit).
Second Part.
284
These three forms have been treated in the first part of the grammar, but the following facts regarding the Verbal Noun of the Simple (I.) form of the verb should be noted: 9
The form
a)
Juis
occurs
especially
verbs of the form JJ6 and Ju6; kill";
pg 6
'
'
in intransitive
verbs of the form Jjc;
^.
> 9
Jyc
jb.
"to
e.g.
Jsjis;
sit".
and iJUi
iJ^is
e.g.
-
in intransitive verbs of the form
from d)
jJa from jJa "to
from *^i "to understand".
"joy" from c)
transitive
"
Juts
b)
e.g.
in
in
verbs of the form
jJii e.g.
"smoothness" and xlll "easiness" from be smooth, easy". l\jo
e)
Trade;
especially
x&>
e.g.
"Caliphate"
I>Li. "tailoring" from
Many
f)
in verbs denoting
verbs
M^>
to
,
intend".
This form of Verbal
"purpose"
from
common
Noun
is
- .
"to
Jwuas 2
Other
follow";
"to sew".
Go,
-_V3 S."
mlm;
g)
Office or
tl
form their Verbal Noun with a
prefixed
e.g.
from -Jfe-
an
0,0,
called
forms of the Verbal
Noun
of
the Simple verb are: 8
> y
9o,
'
o
Joe
e.g.
JJL* "buBiness"
"P ..--( "to ocCUDV from JJLi e in { ,
GO
*w> "part"
*~j> "to divide
.
i
"smallness, ,-
youth
^ -
-
"to be small (
.
lo "to say".
"treatise"
Note. each verb
In the dictionaries the Verbal Noun ia given for Sometimes several forms are in use from the same
verb, either with the 6 o-
same or ,
- ,
different
meanings;
O o,
e.g.
J^ais
and
O-
"purpose" from Jua*; ^^"description" and Kix '-quality"
from
ft*3j
"to describe
2 nd "and 3 rd radicals are the same, of hamzated verbs and of weak verbs are of the same forms as above but subject to the rules for assimilation etc. given in the earlier 3.
The Verbal Nouns of verbs whose
lessons; e.g.
from
to think":
from
"to stand": J.I5
from
jis"
(for
^Ls
(for
cy&) "opinion"; f_^)
"standing";
"to say": jJUu (for iJ^U) "treatise".
Second Part.
286
should be noted that the verbs, whose first 3 which drop the 3 in the Imperf. (Less. 26, 2) have also a Verbal Noun without the first radical; e.g. It
radical
is
,
from J-^5 "to unite":
from
iJLo "tie" (beside jJ^);
vju>ij
o, "to describe": 'A*O "quality". 4. The Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms are given in Lesson 18, 7. In these forms the Part. Pass. is often used with the meaning of the Verbal Noun; e.g.
"that which
^ax\
is
neceseitated"
instead
of
aliasS? "necessity".
The meaning
5.
or "being killed",
the
of
Often
Active or Passive.
it is
sometimes
"being found
Verbal both; it
e.g.
is
existence"
i.e.
Noun Jos
is
is
either
"killing"
only Passive;
e.g. is
(Active only
"finding").
The meaning of the Verbal Noun
way connected with the
is
not in any
idea of time, e.g. jus means either in the past, present
"killing" or "being killed" or future.
In
6.
its
Noun partakes of the of the Noun and of the Verb. As a followed by the Genitive, subjective or syntax the Verbal
characteristics
Noun
it
is
objective; e.g.
j^
JJ3
may mean
"Zaid's killing (someone)"
or-
"the killing of Zaid" as in o
o
j
* *".
f*\
(someone) should
kill
"the king
commanded
that
Zaid".
however the Verbal Noun has both a subject and an object, theln the former is put in the Genitive and the latter in the Accusative or has the Preposition ^; e.g. If
237
Thirty-fourth Lesson.
tj^^
js^5\i or
Jsj:
"the fact of Zaid's killing
Jjcs
Mohammed". So
^^\
also
(his)
"the love of (one's) country".
v^>
rwy'T LJL&J? *^o> "the youth's love of
or
country",
and with a pronominal
"his killing
alia
^s" "my The is
preposition &
employed
suffix:
Mohammed".
love of (my) country". is
also used
indefinitely with
7.
A
verb can always be strengthened or specialised
This (called in Arabic
"').
absolute object") I't.'.k^
absolute
but
may
e.g.
honour of Mohammed".
meaning by the addition of a Verbal Noun
Less. 12,
e.g.
the Verbal Noun
an adverbial meaning,
"I rose in
in
when
I0j|
usually derived from the
is
'-j>
object
is
also
be
^i
L
"he rejoiced greatly". used
"for
derived
same
verb,
(In this case the
distinguishing"
from
(cf.
"the
another
lAjyjJLJ):
verb,
e.g.
'
j
"he rejoiced greatly".
used with the Passive, "he was struck violently". Sometimes the Verbal Noun It is also
an
adjective,
this case
it
is
e.g.
Lyo
used
\L>fO
e.g. is
"he struck a striking". (In
jsuJlxJLJ i.e.
for emphasising.)
Sometimes the Adjective alone the Verbal
Noun
is
struck violently" for
so used without
understood,
e.g.
is
expressed and
ijoJUw
Cya
"he
Second Part.
238
The Verbal Noun may be used thus with a Genior a Suffix or a Relative Sentence, e.g. tive,
.
J^>
LliT
coward"
uiJLs-
like a
i.e.
Pronoun or a
Demonstrative
"thou fearest the fearing of the
coward.
'
"I struck
him
this striking"
i.e.
thus.
"he was struck a striking which pained him". 8.
-G**
The Active
J
O
Participle (J^liil f**\)
which
case used as a Noun, in a Genitive, or as a Verb when it Accusative or the Preposition ,3, if sense of the Imperfect, e.g. "one,
JolklT "he,
who
kills
may
also be
followed by followed by an is used in the
is
it
is it
men".
who
kills
who
strives after
men".
**
3
iJLIJi "he,
But
if
it
is
knowledge".
used in the sense of the Perfect,
can have only the Genitive after "he, who has killed men".
it,
it
e.g.
Exercise 65.
The words
in the following exercises are to be found in the Vocabulary at the end of the book. The rowels of the Article and .some common words are note omitted.
Thirty-fourth Lesson.
L l
*5
^
'
239
U
*^ U -e UU.I
joss-
uLli .
(
MJ !Xi i/li iu^O!
)
,
O ,
Exercise 66.
We
rejoiced greatly,
when we
received the books The love of
you sent (your sending of the
books).
one's land
faith.
is
a part of
(^
-- I praised this
We rose in honour of youth's love of his country. the prince. They have done this deed from hatred of their enemies. After bringing excess of greeting we inform you that the inducement to write it (i.e. this letter) is to ask concerning your health and your circumstances. I shall leave the city (my leaving of the city will be) on the 15 th of November of this year. - I rejoiced greatly that your Excellency has perfect health and security (I rejoice .... at your Excellency's possessing the perfection of etc.).
Second Part.
240
Lesson
Thirty-fifth
Nouns \
and Time.
of Place
Nouns denoting the Time
.
j"*^
Go,
O-o,
..
from ^Jb- "to ,
,
sit":
"O
s
The
'!XAA, e.g.
^Ji^* "place of sitting, assembly";
^
from r*jtf' "to write": from
6,,o,
and
Jou/> 9 o,
,
"to bury": jli
-
o -
^j&*
"office,
school";
"cemetery".
s^Jj/i
Plural of these three forms
Note
an action
the Simple verb
(**"*)'
are of the forms Js***, " -
or Place of
when derived from
is
J*Lix, e.g.
These nouns, when derived from verbs, which
1.
O
o-
have kaara or fatha in the Imperf. are usually of the form Jou^J those from verbs with damma in the Imperf. are of the form -oBut there are many exceptions such as JuAftx.
O
o
Go,
,.
-&/ "place ofsnnriae, East", v_jJw" place, of sunset, Weet'j,
9o-
'
O
o -
all
from verbs, which have
Note
2.
^uCT "to write":
>
book-shop";
in the Imperf.
is used e.g. G -o. G--O , i^Ji&Q "office" and iyJlXx "library,
Go,
,,
-
from
damma
From some verbs more than one form --
-
from
\
"place of praying, mosque," ^J***A "dwelling place",
\\^M+A
*3$ "to place":
O-o,
*>j* and
g&j*
"place".
6,0
Note
3.
verbs whose
A
rarer form
first radical is
in
use
is
oL^
(especially
from
or ^5), e.g.
O , , -, O -o from JOj "to bear children": J^Ly(for ^_^) "time of birth";
241
Thirty-fifth Lesson.
"to promise": OULAX (for oLs^s) "time of fulfilling
from >Ac promise, term"; so
Go.
c^
from the noun
also
"time"
G , oliu/
G (for
.^>! O
from
o
^j^
:
Gs,iJL^>| "little sister";
O~ (for _^o)
Go
Go^,
2 ,1
"son":
^^
(for
^^vo)
"little
son";
G s,> i-ut or v^ivo "daughter": iuuo "hHtle daughter";
O-o
from
"sister
243
Thirty-fifth Lesson. *
o ,
from "a ij^i,
9
J
little
Note.
"thing": ^e^i (for ,^-i) or
at the
from xjjli;
are often used to express endear-
The form
i3_^*s is
,y^
from
jOlaJf
>o
,-f
o
Axe;
used with Proper
.i)JLi
^S
JOb
i-o
v-o
ol
e.g.
rr ^_y^
&JJt
67.
^u
LJJ
i
Jc
-
/
ij| .Xs*
,
ll! IJ^
^>^f- from
*>.'**
Relative Adjectives often that of an abstract idea,
"deity".
Oio,
o,
"monthly", 'iLt^ "monthly
(.%
wages". Adjectives. 3.
The
following forms of the Adjective
have been already mentioned
(*>
^-J)
10):
Active Participle.
a) Joiii
o'
(Less.
-
b) J-oii (sometimes also
used in Passive sense,
e.g:
!uxs "killed"). c)
3^6.
d)
o^*.
e)
JJ^T (for Colours and Defects).
f)
4.
Pass. Part. (Less. 17,
']j
The
4).
following forms are also of
common
occur-
rence: g)
form
Jo6 JJti,
especially e.g.
^JM>
from intransitive verbs of the "difficult"
from
^ju^>
"to
be
"to
be
difficult".
6,^
6
i)
iS,
"beautiful" from
f
*
^--J*
Jj^ especially from intransitive verbs of the form
e.g.
j)
*
,
h) jje, e.g. Q-JS* beautiful".
^
^ii,
"joyful" from e.g.
^
'^
"naked".
"to be joyful".
247
Thirty-sixth Lesson.
G a, k) v3l* (intensive)
from
^S^
"to
o s v.jLxi'
"addicted to lying"
lie".
The verbs whose 'second
Note.
radical is
So.
G
oL>
(j)
" (^5),
G-
G- r
-
from v-jtb
^
change
e.g.:
"to be excellent"
"excellent"; ,
^ or
G-,
J*A9 which becomes Jy3,
the form Jojti into
from
e.g.
to
b
good"
vv^3
(for
G
v^s-Ja and
"good".
The form &*$
5.
one who
also used to indicate
is
exercises a trade or profession, G s
e,g.
Jlr (from J^r "to G
-
s -
carry")
"a porter", and so jl^> "a baker"; J?L3- "a
tailor";
9UL, "a
water-carrier".
These words use the
'
Sound
plural, e.g.
The
6.
o j&, o-5J^
Elative (j-y^ixjT
etc>
L\ see Less. 10,
always formed from the three radicals, 9 >)
"long";
more
Some
* o
3_>^>!
e.g.
37)
is
Ju^b (Root
G * ^ "longer"; js-o* "excellent"
excellent".
such as the Participles of the
adjectives,
Derived forms and words of the form
Joist cannot form such phrases as the following
In these cases Elatives. are used:
G-OJ
,,0x>>-o
j^gJcs* "diligent"
more as
tol$a>f ytft
"more
diligent"
lit.
to diligence.
#.*.*.,
>-o &}*,\
"black" !ojj*
j^i! "blacker"
lit.
stronger as
to blackness. 7.
If the
second part of the comparison is not a or an adverbial determination,
noun but a whole sentence
Second Part.
248
it
is
preceded by
^ with a
Preposition (If.
(J
*\
U*
*'
-
&
o
Li*
U
^
with a verb or the
suffix of the Personal
_0,0,o
}*(>.
j^Jl
sjikll
pleasanter to-day than jlj^J?
(for
it
v_ftLJ!
*W lit.
"than
Li
jJb
(Proverb)
(Proverb)
xxiL
^1
UJ
is
or: it
yesterday".
Exercise 69.
S\
e.g.
"the weather
was yesterday" l^5l
Pronoun,
-,G
c,
LljN!
249
Thirty-eeventh Lesson.
Exercise 70.
more diligent to-day than he ink is blacker than yours (thy The Egyptian We arrived in Cairo by rail. ink). If God will, the weather is cleverer than the Syrian. This will be better to-morrow than it was yesterday. This water-carrier
is
My
was yesterday.
prouder (stronger as to pride) than that The porters are more diligent than the The crowd at the festivities was greater than tailors. We went further away than we inwe thought. This wine is excellent, it is more excellent tended. than that, which we drank yesterday. is
Englishman Frenchman.
Thirty-seventh Lesson.
1.
Words may be divided according
into: a) Class 2.
The
names ^lf\ names
Class-
(,.
Concrete
a)
6
o^.
(
~
>
JLJ): b)
to their
are divided into: e
o
>
*
Nouns as Jo^ ^J), whether &
"man", ^js "horse" or Adjectives as
Jjl>
meaning
Proper names (puSty
-
wJ^
"riding",
"sitting". *o,
b)
Abstract
(^*iw
Go. "science",
"ignorance"
J^s* O,
"understood",
Go
id
fp
Q
whether
Nouns
as S
or
Adjectives
as
^le ">'-
^*
,
,&>
"concealed".
Abstract nouns when used in a general sense and without further determination always take the Article, e.g. O-
-
iJLyo=i
>-
so also with
pGjJw metals".
*
5
E
iicl^Jt "bravery
names LLsjlj
is
a virtue
;
of material,, e.g.
L^S\
"gold and silver are two
Second Part.
250
Proper Names.
Proper names are always definite and so can O > , Sobe the subject of a Nominal sentence, e.g. -Jj^ jy^ Zaid is a man". 3.
Proper names are either Simple or Compound. The Simple may consist of three or more radicals, G-o
9 oe.g.
-
Ja'far. AJJ Zaid; ^a*^
The Compound may
Two names
a)
A
or b)
consist of:
placed together,
noun with a
e.g.
>
Io
a^oai! oaJ^I
e.g.
(the *UJ{
Jill
*
} ya*
2
3
see Intro.
^Ll!
a-jj^aiLo
but are gene-
gender,
The Feminine ending ^L. jo.,
,
"bees",
of the Letters of the
Common j ,
rally
J^
e.g.
Note
6,
2) is
used in the
following cases: a)
Some
Substantives have
it,
e.g.
^$^
"remem-
brance"; LJO "world" (properly fem. of the Elative of J,o
"low";
LjjJt
in contrast with
is
used
for
present world"
"this
Sy>^! "the future world"). '
b) Adjectives of the
minine
jjti,
e.g.
form
o ^>
otlcafr 9"angry",
take as their Fe-
Fem.
(jr
-o*.
adjectives of the form
*x=* (but not O
O^U3 (with nunation),
e.g.
o
l
"repentant", Fem. c)
j
O >*J'^; jy& >
of
(Dimin.
,-^t
e.g.
man", Plur. Q_jJU>jtheir
in
Fern,
"official", Plur.
s,
e.g.
OJy _y>U;
J
"believer", Plur. ^^j-u^.
'5s-
4)
Nouns
of the form
which denote workers
,31*3
O
at
trade
a
"tailor", 5)
or
Plur.
Relative
profession
e.g.
^l
o
Plur.
Adjectives
O^!
(Less.
36,
1),
e.g.
5
-bLi.
o &f*. jJist
denoting Elatives,
a /^Ti. O--
son
i *
(for yj), Plur.
o yLj
(also
slLl)
-*- .
- -
,J!c
e.g.
following Plurals should be noted:
o
^1
5),
Adjectives of the form
The 6
36,
>blli.
"Egyptian", Plur. 6)
(Less.
world,
^^^
earth,
o-^9
Q ^f
Jpf family,
^
also
^!;')
(also
master, o,,
Also the Fern,
Arabic Grammar.
iu**
"year", Plur.
_^*/ (as well as
Second Part.
258
Plural Feminine
3.
The Sound
1.
Feminine Proper Names,
also for Masculines ending in
used
is
for:
e.g. Jvi>, Plur.
e.g. xilk,
,
Plur. G-
2)
names ending
Class
Many
in
g,
e.g.
o^b
f
\.
sjb> "city-
quarter", Plur. 3)
o^L>. The Feminines
of Adjectives, whose Masc. takes G
the
Sound
Masc. Plur., G
-
4) Adjectives the
or *!_^ (Less. 38, 5, G ,.* > Plur. o'y.*/ (rare); 5)
Names
S
c
o^a*
"tailoresses",
6),
*
Letters
(fern.),
O^,oPlur.
i!y^> "green"
(fern.), ol^^ai-. of the alphabet and of
O^SOs^j
Ot
Muharram,
"greatest"
^'^S
e.g.
"-
the months, e.g. vjji "alif",
6)
"Egyptian women".
Feminine of which end in \$
of the
Plur.
,
oLjtf "female writers",
e.g.
Plur. olllt;
^-^
month
the
oU^.
Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms, O
^
Oi
i,
"written work", Plur. oLaJu";
vJyaj
But the Verbal Nouns of the have also Broken
Plurals,
e.g.
e.g.
J^Jtl
"disposal",
Plur.
, -
II.
jj_^xaj'
and IV. forms Plur.
"picture",
'
C-
-
o
,
,
"false news", Plur. 7)
Diminutives of words denoting things and G
tional beings, e.g. 8)
e
o-*
^*
"little
Foreign words, even
dog", Plur.
i>!_^
lit
G
..,
-
- -
(Turkish) "Aga", Plur. oJ_^t; (L^lyi-)
(Persian) "Sir",
kish) "Bey", Plur.
irra-
>
when they denote male
*
persons, e.g.
,o-
oL*K.
Plur.
ol.
ol>!^;
J^o (5La) (Tur-
259
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
Note.
(Less. 38,7, Note)
^iXoJLS
Another form
is
A-Ju^i, PI or.
makes
Plur.
oL *
Note the two following words: u ~j.Us>
or
bath"
cf.
o!_^)
Note
Plur.
3
Less. 36,
The Sound
1.
cially of the Pass. Part.) is
Plur.
"heaven",
SL^,
1.
Fern. Plural of the Participles (espeoften used with a Neuter meaning, O , o^
G > o ^ G - ^ oLufc' or o!oy>-jx "existing things", ' .-
e.g.
oULU-;
olijL^
"created
things".
Note typical cf.
Of words derived from verbs that end in ^ or ^5
2.
Fern. Plurals are: from
Sound
Intro.
Note
6,
G --. girl", Plur.
oLxs
3) "prayer", Plur. G ,., or oj^Xs.
o - o \, s^Lo (also written H^Jlo
o!_^>; from
U6 "young
Broken Plurals.
The most
4.
Plural
frequently used forms of the Broken are:
(jZ&t i^>) A.
From 1.
O
Fjom
triliteral
jjd
Jo:l5; e.g.
From jJS
fects),
e.g.
3^1;
^f
Go,
wobo
b)
"blue"
(fern.),
Plur.
(fern,
j.
w^
5
.
ji'.
Plur.
"white", Plur.
*&
"companion", Plur.
(adjectives denoting colours
^]p 'blue",
From
(rare).
G
,
2.
a)
nouns.
^j;
JL>
!>jTi
(for
and
de-
"black", Plur.
ja^);
of the preceding), e.g.
Ms^J
Second
260
From
c)
jJS, e.g. jslTl
Plur. Jjo) Chouse",
J
3.
Ga
e.g.
K*La G
"G-O
iJU (for idUU) "religion", Plur.
Ja3;
of
G-o
*!),
(rarely
Plur. oJLf; jfo (for
to 5.
3i.
G.o-
From xUa -
"lion",
Note
3 o, cf.
G-o G
Part.
^;
From
iJLi,
G
x-^>
From
b)
Plur.
(fern.),
,>
"rank",
x*^
G^
_>
Plur. G
j
v^J,;
s
iU
- >
s,^^ "form", Plur. j^a.
(cf.
Less. 38,
5),
-l
e.g.
"other"
^>\ (without nunation); ^jIxJl "the greatest"
Plur.
(fern.),
^^3-.
-o> e.g.
vJ:
"dome", Plur.
H^ "manner
'G,'
"tent", Piur.
-OJ a)
O^
JJU;
G-'G^O-
life", Plur.
Plur.
"piece",
'
j. G*o^
From
c 3
^
or
Plur.
e.g.
iJixi
(especially
Plur. 5JJ; xl/o "dynasty",
i^S
"village",
^. From
d)
xlls (rare), e.g.
5.
a)
From
5l*3
second radical 3 or
from words with medial
^)
t
e.g.
is
iU
"beard", Plur.
^
Jo
(but not from words in which the
doubled or from those that end in
olir "book",
Plur. wJb'.
o b)
From
J^oe (but not from words, the third radical *
of which
is
^ or ^5), e.g.
From
"way", Plur.
G *> GJw*. iJu*9, e.g. xjjj^i "city", Plui\ G.
c)
^^
261
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
From
d)
Flur.
9
6
Jjja, e.g.
J^
,
,
"messenger, ambassador",
jJJ. G
Go, e)
From Joe Go* Joe
Note.
G
Go,
, ,
or Joe
(rare), e,g.
u&~ u roof
',
6 ,, often
is
met with beside
Oj> Plur. ^jJu,. G ,E
Jots (see
e.g. ^X**l
1),
G o "Jion", Plnr. Jsj*l or %Xw5. tt>
6.
G
Jue. ' Go.
oi
From
a)
"lance",
Joe, G ; Plur. _.U
;
v_Ji
e.g. s
-
,
"garment", Plur. LjUi; g-^ "wind", Plur. b)
From '
c)
3u>; Plur.
From ili^
G /G >Joe, e.g. Jcj^ G ,G,--
Joe and
"neck",
Go,
v
"wine-skin", Plur.
vj '
;
'
GPlur.
"dog",
iJLs,
O *. Plur. JLa*,.
"man", G
e.g.
Plur. vji,;
l^.
- ,
Jsx> "mountain", Plur.
^b
(for
j^3) "house",
the meaning "land"). jlo (with A d)
From J^i
(but not
when used with
Passive
O meaning), e.g. ^..y "generous", Plur. ^ty. G ',
e)
From
f)
From
a)
From
b)
From
a)
From
idi', e.g. sS,' "piece of paper", Plur. OoO^o-. ^ixs, e.g. iLs^j "sheep" Plur. TL*j.
jJJ, e.g. vXxc "slave", Plur. ^^c.. G G , G Joe, e.g. ; 1^> "ass", Plur. -tg^s*8.
Oo^ Joe, e.g. 'O
"science",
G-
Go,
Gfc,
^.
Plur.
,._^Lc;
J^i.
O>jOo
Oci--
vIJ| O
o
"heart";
Plur.
^^
v-^JLii;
G
,
"troop",
Plur.
j >
jjlc g
/
Second Part.
262
"right",
Plur.
>
"house", Plur.
"king", Plur.
o_^-o.
G
G ,E
Js~t
e.g.
Plur.
"lion",
>&
G .,
o^t;
^^JU
^Ju.
From
c)
>
G .Jj*,
From
b)
^
"bead", Plur. JL3 ,J;
tH> gj&>\ G
when second
not
(but
J^tli
radical
is
G
doubled, or the medial radical
is
,
or
j^>lu, L?), e.g.
"witness", Plur. 9.
G
From
G
-
Joib,
e.g.
"sleeper", Plur.
Joe.
G=
.
judge
,SLs>
,
Plur.
G
,
^s>\
-
(JU
JJ 10.
G
Only from
G
-
Ju;l5,
e.g.
3& -
^tf
5 s> "writer", Plur. oUtf.
11. *l*i.
Only from
.j^'J
when
it
denotes rational beings G
and has not
if;
Plur.
or
5
^
as third radical, e.g.
Plur. &j) ^5L "seller",
,
^jK
"writer",
(for -^11).
12. xiii.
Only from
J^
and the word denotes Plur.
s%
when
the third radical
is
^ or
^
rational beings, e.g. j!5 "governor",
(for xljj); oais
"judge", Plur. sUaS (for 13.
iU*ii).
Si.
Go. a)
^
From
Joii
"ox", Plur.
s
in words with medial 3 or ^5,
e.g.
268
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
b)
From
(for^l)
when
Juis
the third radical
*
G
-.
From
jbe, e.g. ^l^. "gazelle", Plur.
d)
From
Jyje
when
the third radical
G
G,
e.g.
is
iJ;c..
3 or
^,
e.g.
o
*x^o) "boy", Plur. iU*x3.
14.
a)
^,
0- o
c)
(for
3 or
"brother", Plur. *y>i. O
Plur.
is
From
Jj6, e.g.
^'
Joel.
"sea", Plur.
^111
b) c)
From From
JJ6, e.g.
"foot", Plur. J^-jt.
jJ^,
jli, e.g. jJs "bolt", Plur. JJsl
From Femmines, which do
not end in s, and d) which have a long vowel between the second and G
third radical, e.g.
G
-
^o
"arm", Plur.
j
oc
5
^
^o!; ^-^^ "oath",
>oE
(and
iL
jJb
16.
From
(rare).
jli when the second
radical
is
doubled,
e.g.
G,
"uncle", Plur.
u.
n. a) is
From JJ6
(jJii especially,
^ or the middle radical
is
when the
^ or ^},
first
i
e.g.
ja^
(
radical
"person",
264
Second Part.
.
o
Plur.
G
og
c^o
u^Ls^t;
Plur.
O tjj]; ^ o
Plur.
o
,
"time",
*Jj "day", Pliy.
j[CT (for
-
c,
O>
plj!,]);
"colour",
J
?^Ji "thing", *O o
(without nunation,
ui;
"suckling", Plur.
From
Less. 41,
2
Joo
a);
, ,
"cause", Plur. ^^ O^osOei
e.g.
Jjii,
cf.
"spirit", Plur. G
6^-
O^, (for
o
^&s
oli^5;
j:
i'uui!
b)
Plur.
,3^) "condition", Plur. 3[^>!; ^jl
(for
Plur. 9Uj
From
c)
o
From
d)
^^L^
J^li, e.g. '
with Passive sense);
J^ots (not
"noble", Plur.
"friend", Plur.
-
^
\3y'
t
(for
^^)
Note specially ^xc "enemy", Plur.
e)
e.g.
"dead", Plur. 9t
18.
From
a)
5lii,
Plur. ^Ij^ "food",
e.g.
O,'c6
O
"physic", Plur. iu^ol; -.^L- "weapon", Plur. >4
leader
Imam,
of prayer", G,
"vessel", Plur. lyoJ; b)
From
radical of
O
^,
3
or
which
is
13),
e.g.
proof, Plur. Sol =
S
pl
v-jf^'
"dust", Plur.
c)
(for xMll); G^ oc *jy>!.
G,
,
Uuc,
"loaf",
(for S?of);
bj^t).
G
j
G
,
From Jyd,
e.g.
Note specially
j^ "valuable,
dear", Plur.
> ,
,
o^+c "column", Plur.
ot3 "valley", Plur.
O
os
ioul
Plur.
G d)
9^
doubled, or of which the third radical
G- oS (for
'xj?
-
^[
J^*i (especially with Adjectives, the second
G is
Plur.
->
G
z
,
K^JUt;
(i
265
Thirty-ninth Lesson.
19.
From
J^oc (especially from roots with doubled second
when
radical, or with final ^ or ^),
O
of
male
to
refers
it
O
.
persons, e.g. (jJvX-o "friend", Plur. iUxot; "phy-
*LJI); Jet "rich", Plur. *Lji].
sician", Plur. illbf (for
20.
ji.
6 a)
From
Jyjii
usually
-
-
xs "slain", Plur.
with Passive meaning,
o-
C-
,
Jj6; *0j> "wounded", Plur.
dead", Plur. b)
From
Sui, e.g.
a)
From
j, 'idle", Plur.
^i^J
21.
iiis.
(f ma l6 persons but not
J4**
u
[^*. O^ xiobs- "novelty", Plur.
O- '-
b) i
From O
~
A3_>
jJUli,
e.g.
^
>
i^-
,
(for XjLix3L>)
"nobles", Plur.
u^^
"slave-girl",
Plur.
^ty?-)
ty>- (for
(for
Less. 41.
cf.
25. JJUi.
From Feminine nouns, which have
a long vowel *"
between the second and third
e.g.
J--O,, woman",
Plur.
> >:
radicals,
^_^ * ,
>
*
.
old ,
Plur. _J^S; xJw^ "letter",
"wonderful thing", Plur.
^o^.
Note specially -^xa "pronoun", Plur. 26. a)
Article b)
From
(with Article
Ac
"maiden", Plur. J !L\C (with
,^3
"legal decision", Plur. 3 ji
^Sils, e.g. ^!^
^lA*!?).
From
jjJ, e.g.
O c)
Note
specially
"people, family", Plur. Plur.
{l "lands".
*G oS
o-
A-J
fy
"night",
Plur.
"inhabitants";
JLJ;
y^J
J^l
"earth",
Fortieth Lesson.
269
27.
used with 26
a) Is
b) lative),
From JoU e.g.
jl>
Plur.
b; so
and u^Ls.
^!Ac
"pregnant", Plur.
JL>.
c)
From
^i,
d)
From
ijL*i (with final ^ or ^5), e.g.
Cup; xlu
Plur.
^ilr
e.g.
From
"fate, death", Plur.
xitli
(with medial ^
"corner", Plur.
'i^
"idle", Plur.
ClU;
iLLr.
pJ>
"gift",
iUc,' "flock",
"subjects".
jilej
e)
e.g.
(
a,
(Feminine, but not that of the Super-
and
also final
s or
^c),
bl^'.
Broken Plurals of quadriliteral nouns.
B.
1. The three forms that occur have been mentioned already hi Less. b.
28.
"star", Plur.vlj'ly'; slbli "bridge", Plur.
o,
Nouns formed from triliteral roots by prefixing take the same forms of Plural as quadriand t
j.
literals,
and
hence the forms: Jodtf, J^l
iJ^p' "experience",
J^
(for
Plur.
^f^', c*-^
"place", Plur.
JJb?)
"the greatest", Plur.
^'
e.g.
"school", Plur.
JL#
(for JJi>');
(31 "the nobles".
29.
From
quadriliterals,
which have a long vowel O
tween the third and fourth Plur.
^xki-1;
Ju^*
radical, e.g.
"lamp",
Plur
-
o
be-
I
ol^i*-
"Sultan",
Second Part.
270
o
- -
,
"coffer", Plur.
~
^U
/-ijjUjo;
"window", Plur.
"throne", Plur. ^~\j>', '^.^ "desert", Plur.
^c~
(
So
from
in 28)
(as
the forms J^Ui', J**fcUx and Plur.
(cf.
Jjj'uai'
JtgclsT, e.g. jj_^oj'
Less. 39, 2);
news", Plur. also a
is
Plur. JLyo!^>;
Note
^S
specially:
"crown", Plur.
U^f,!
(cf.
S~
>
There
"picture",
ZliL "key", Plur. ^oUx;
"letter", Plur. J-uulX*; jwJl/t
"false
^U.
with prefixes arise
triliterals
Less. 39, *
form J^cl^s,
>
JuJI??; 2).
,
e.g. u-ysls- "buffalo",
"law", Plur. ^-Jl^S. Plur..
^iLo "dinar",
_J-ota;
O |^JO
"diwan, collection of poetry", 30. a)
From many
So,
xJJ
Relative Adjectives
G,
,2*' S
.
j^t
From
O-
certain
1),
"Armenian", Plur.
o-
Xix^h ^50! job "man of Bagdad", b)
Less. 36,
(cf.
O-^S-o*
e.g. jj^w "Moor", Plur. /O^'UM;
--
Plur.
quadriliteral
nouns
indicating
persons (whether with long vowel before the last radical O a
-
or not), especially from Foreign words, e.g.^L> "giant", e.
Plur. G
.,
,
o
,
o
G..-S
*
oLcwl (Persian) "teacher", Plur. BjjU^; '
^,^
j
"philosopher", Plur.
x&l!; SSi Note
1.
Plur.
In nouns that contain more than four radicals O fall
o
,
O
i-ie,
"bishop",
"angel", Plur.
the extra letters generally v
^aiu-t
Ka^iLs;
but not always,
e.g.
out, e.g.
, >
>
*
o-
o^Xxc
"spider", Plur,
,
-4^-J' "interpreter", Plur.
>
271
Fortieth Lesson.
Note
Many nouns have
2.
Note
5, 3,
G,oc spring, notable o , 035
"eye,
G
> o
and Oy^t
"slaves",
Note
3.
e.g. ,-**.
2),
G
,,
"
and n,***
,-rff-^
GO.
"notables"; ^Xxt "slave,
springs", (J-kcf
G
person",
Plur.
of Broken G o.,
forms
different
Plural with different meanings (see Less.
eyes, G .
Piur.
servant",
Jy^
.
oUc
"servants of God".
From some
Plurals a
second Plural G
is
formed,
..
sometimes Sound, sometimes Broken, e.g. /afjJs "way", Plur, G. G,, G.,, 02 Plar. of the Plur, olS-b; Jo "hand", Plur. Joi, Plur. of j^jto, .
,S
a
O,
-
Plur. Obi;
Sli[
_
5
,E
"vessel", Plur. &-u!, Plur. of Plur.
^1.1.
2. In many Relative Adjectives the Feminine ending gives the sense of the Plural. (Properly it is an
abstract Collective
cf.
Less. 36,
iJ^. "mariners"; ^^o "Sufi
2),
^^
e.g.
(mystic)",
"mariner",
iUs^o "Sufis".
In like manner the Feminine of some words of the form 3ls
is
used,
^{JS "bowman, Cawass",
e.g.
"bowmen, Cawasses".
X-w5y>
The following Irregular Plurals should be noted
3.
G
G --
2
*
"mother", Plur.
.1
"mouth" j
(cf Less. 7,
G
9U "water" *aJi
(for
U
i^i.
G
O ^oS
and
for y),Plur. s^xj
G
,
!
uyo (for
"lip" (for x^i), Plur. $lLi.
lw "sheep"
G-
9-
G,,,
-
(for *P^ii), Plur.
G< iixi
Plur.
2),
G^_
.
and
Lii
G
-
six*;.
--
"maid-servant", Plur. Suj and ot^oi..
s- o
Hlt "woman",
-
Plur.
G
-
o
9LJ and s^J and
G
, o
8!
:
Second Part.
272
Plur.
^Llj^* "man", Go, "bow", Plur.
^Gl usually
2
>
H> and Exercise 75.
*lj ofj
15,1
U
^
.Xj
*
viUi5
a*>
ji
U,
v^jJ! ^U
kl
IJ^P
JUil
^A;/
i
UJU
Lo
*>
s 0^*0
j.yI
[>.
oli'
lbJ
^1
Li
5
I^-
U
!
yUi
L
Fortieth Lesson.
tot
273
jiJK
cr '
u Jo
Exercise 76.
A
had a slave (from the slaves), and one day the philosopher said to his slave, "I wish to go to one of the baths." The soldiers bound the This man was one of prisoneid with (the) chains. the dearest of his friends, Who will pay the expenses of the journey? In this land I saw many schools, in which the scholars learn the sciences; and their teachers are of the learned. Inform me soon of th hy certain philosopher
condition (Plur.), for thy friendship is dearer than all Kiss the hands of the brothers andexisting things. The most honourable ruler and the most sisters. noble Sultan, possessor of the greatest happiness and
of the highest (Superlative of
U)
rank,
God
perpet-
uate his days and raise his standards! Amen. --- All the travellers both men and women (what was between the men and the women) were smitten with seasickness.
The
of the wine-skins.
Arixbic
Grammar.
rains pour
down
like
the
mouths
Second Part.
274
Forty-first
Lesson
Declension of the Noun. f-cl)
Nouns
1.
Q
7.
are either Indeclinable ({/**),
"Cautionl", ^iLi clinable
and
8ee Lessons 6
e.g.
"Qatam" (name of a woman), or De-
,*o>
(uyt*).
The Declinable
are
either Triptotes
(O^AO**) *e
having three case-endings
man",
or
Diptotes
endings only "idle",
(Less.
(OJAOJU 6,
.*i)
2.
The
a)
Broken Plurals of the forms
9^
^SUsf,
JJUi and j^JUi
"first"),
^1
(from
also
(Less. 38, 5, 6), e.g. t\*Je "desert",
tl>
"angry", \gjf& "remembrance",
is
Plurals
and
"thing").
jli,
c)
j.*i
the
^T "other")
The Feminine forms *S&,
b)
e.g.
following are Diptote:
(from Jjf
(from
1),
"a
two case-
with
i.e.
2 b and Note
J^
e.g.
a),
i.e.
,
"Omar".
*c
S,
3^1
(Less. 6, 2
>
Nouns
of the form
jjd>],
^Jl/
jis and "white",
"greatest".
the Feminine of which
slxs or joe (denoting colours, defects or elative), e.g.
i3j*f
"black", ^S\ "greater".
Forty-first Lesson.
275
6 -OS
On
the other hand
"widower" makes a
J^f
Feminine
6.,o
"widow".
XJLs.1
form
d) Adjectives of the
which
is
On
jS,
e.g.
OL^
the other hand
(Fern,
^Uxi
the Feminine of
oSL*i
"angry".
lafc)
xiUxi)
(Fern.
"companion
at table". e)
The Numerals which end
alone as pure numbers, the half of six". f)
e.g.
in
when they stand
s
xx~ v^*aj x&Li
"three
is
Most Proper names (see Less. 37, 3, 4) includthat end in whether Masc. or Fern. e.g.
all
ing
tejo (masc.), iuJal^ e.g.
*E/j,
J&*\
x&;
all
that end in
those that end in
or
t>\
^!_,
e.g.
^JL
^ulll,
names
that correspond in form Uii; with a verbal form whether Perfect or Imperfect, e.g. also the Proper
o
^Zii
(name of a
^J^
1U,
tribe),
J^>t,
^-jjj;
also
(name of a woman). ^>^\&
Proper names on the
other
"e
and so with
ful").
o
G
Amr", -jj "Noah", jJ0 (but
other
names of women);
or Adjectives,
e.g.
^-
2)
.
etc.
also
il*
originally
(properly "beauti-
iAl(properly "happy"),o{jj (properly (properly "praised"); 3) certain
6,0-
are
Triptote o i O G, are 1) of the forms Joe, Jue, Joe, e.g. *x^,
"Zaid", 3 !iU
Participles
as
.
hand
G o- S
when they
others
many
single
"desired"),
names
as
Second Part.
276
3, All Diptotes, when they are made definite by the Article or a Possessive suffix or a following Genitive are treated as Triptotes (see. Lees. 6, 3), e.g.
ftl*37
^
from the matters,
,
from his matters,
**
from the boy's matters. 4.
The nouns, which end
iwun, iyun and uyun) "judge",
fcls),
in
_
(arising
cto (for _^!o) "caller", 6i
e.g.
O (for
in
(for
^
from
yds
."wish", change:
iwun, iwin, iyun, iyin, uyun, uyin into In, iwu, iyu, uyu, into o, iwi, iyi, uyi, into
i,
iwu, iyu, uyu, iwi, iyi, and.uyi into Note 2 and Less. 28, 2) e.g.
"judge"
Nom. and Gen.
I (cf.
Less. 6, 3,
Sing.
Accus. Sing.
,,
"two judges" Nom. Dual. Gen. and Accus. Dual. li
''judges"
Nom.
Plur.
Gen. and Accus, Plur.
With
Article:
Nom. and Gen.
^liff "the judge"
or "of the judge"
Sing. .
Accus. Sing.
The Broken
Plurals, which are Diptotes and are derived from ver1 3 .--hose third radical is 5 or ^5, have the Nom. and Gen. in, in the Aceus. iya, as endings
m
e.g.
from slU- "slave f
girl", Plur.
Nom. and Gen. ,U>
Forty-first Lesson.
Accus.
277
from ^^s& "legal decision", Plur. Nom.
(^f^s-;
(
and Gen. j&, Accus. ^Lxi. 5.
Nouns, which end in an (written
as Uac "stick" (for j>oc),
"Mustafa"
JtL*2s>
^vX^ "guidance"
(for ^0*3*) are alike in
(
the Singular;
J_!L
the Diptotes
so also are
as
or ^5-
(for all
)
^JN^),
cases of "re-
(j^o
membrance", LOO "world". o 6.
The noun
"son"
jt
cr conies between the
its
drops'
when
alif,
it
name of the son and that of the The Proper name preceding it loses its nun-
father.
ation, e.g. jj+s.
^1
^j
happens
retained
It is also (cf.
Intro. o
.,
begin a new line the
to
11, }
a
4
if
the word
^1
is
alif is
"Zaid
-
>
^ - ,
l3
^vX
the
retained.
e.g.
b),
c
is
the son of Amr".
Exercise
Less. 7, 2)
if
used predicatively
Go,
22+B ^jj sXfj
(see.
But
"Zaid the son of 'Anir".
j^
>
af-
.a!
> *
77.
o *
(jf^Jb
o> -J/
,
^U-JL,
e
Li
o,
(oJlXs tjai^
^
, (
c5Ul
A-JLt
bf
L
ol
s , ,
jo^i
Second Part.
278
&U!
Js+c
Ll
b
Exercise
him with
Strike
J,
78.
Five
the stick.
is
the half of
The Caliph el-Mu'tasim was acquainted
ten.
L.I?
C
and Imperf.) with AH, the son of el-Junaid el-Iskaft and el-Mu tasim said to the son of Hainmad, "Go to the son of el-Junaid and tell him to prepare to be-aguest to me" and he came to him and said to him, f
"Prepare to be-a-guest of the Commander of the Faithful, be a guest of Caliphs is a great thing (is great). It was said to a boy, "Does not thy teacher cloths thee?" And he answered, "Verily, if my teacher had a house filled with needles, and Jacob came and with him the prophets as intercessors and the angels as pledges, to borrow from him a needle with which to sew the garment of his son Joseph, which was torn, he would not lend (Perf.) him it; then how should he for to
clothe
me?"
_______ Forty-second Lesson. The Use
of the Cases. 6
(A word in the Nominative Accusative
O>o^ wa^a,
is
called
6join the Genitive
>o
p^y>, in the
s? or
jo-
279
Forty-second Lesson.
1.
The Nominative
a)
The Subject
used for:
is
(jsj)
in a Verbal sentence (Jcli)
of a Nominal sentence (sSoJLo). b)
The Predicate
See Less. 11, c)
and that
See Less. 11,6.
Nominal sentence
of the
6.
The word
following the Particle of Address Ljl
(always used with the Article) and after G (in the Sing, without nunation), when it is not made definite by a See Less. 48. following word.
The
d)
Attribute
word
or
of,
in
to
Apposition
another word in the Nominative. a
The Predicate of sentences beginning with
Note.
kindred particles (see below
2 h)
G 2.
The Accusative
a)
The Object
or the
put in the Nominative.
o -
(v^xaj) is
4^0),
(
is
,-.t
used
for:
e.g.
"I struck Zaid".
"Thee we sJiijio
Note
1.
serve".
"I struck him".
In Arabic most verbs denoting w
transitive.
The
intransitive
^j^OT JoUII.
transitive
verb
is
called
*'to .
-.'Go
^.Xjuii
come" are > O OS J*ftJl, the
Note. 2. For the government of theAccus. by the Verbal Noun and the Participle see Less. 34, 6, 8. b)
The Absolute Object
or
Cognate Accusative
see Less. 34, 7.
Go,
c
Determinations of Time and Place
Less. 45, 5, e.g.
^jf
"in the morning",
O&
see
"to-day", {j; "to-morrow",
xL
Jw
"(during)
a whole year".
Second Part.
280
"he looked right and
left",
t^ U VsU,
"he travelled by land and sea".
To
class
this
2
Determinations
^3
Ul'Jl
sL>.
\Ls\j
of the
Aim
(cf.
"above",
Less. 34,
(3ls-) for
and Verbal Noun are used
e.g. 6).
which the
generally,
e.g.
"he cauae riding". O
o,
Specification (j^i) with the
f)
*i
or Purpose,
"I rose to honour him"-
Determinations of Condition
e)
Participle
the Accus.
in
^jtL> "behind",
e.g.
etc.
^^=' "under", d)
many words
belong
used as Prepositions,
meaning "in regard
to, in", e.g. o
o -
>, o
O
^1
Jv.)
* o
cr LJLc
3J
c.
"
Zai d
is
greater in regard
c
to
knowledge than Amr". ill!
w^3
"be good in regard
to soul"
i.e.
"rejoice
heartily". g)
The
Predicate
and
(^>] of
its
sisters
(cf.
Less. 30, 12), e.g. yj>.j
JJj
^ "Zaid
h) The Subject
o
\
oa
"truly",
^
^1 "that", v^yJ
"for", ^yCJ "but";
"because",
"0 would
*jfe LXJ-' ."{ "J C'g
or tSu:
The noun
jJL=S ^^IlJ
^'
i.e.
^
"as
if";
that!", J*^ "perhaps"; e.g.
'V
l^ i)
was a man".
after the following particles:
after
^
*jl5
...I
l^
iwJs
the ^
for
"truly, Zaid
that
denies
the denial of the
absolutely class)
cf.
Forty-second Lesson.
3 p
Less. 45,
yu $
"there
The noun
3.
jo i "there
"the matter
i.e.
The Noun
j)
"0
e.g.
is
absolutely necessary".
Address
jJI
Jj?
Note
*
or in
of,
2.
The Accusative ,
it
Appoe.g.
often stands in single expressions is to be supplied, e.g,
where a verb O
^X>
"welcome!", where
is
understood, t
have come
where
when
"I thought Zaid (to be) a physician".
G?
^5>t
&$*2
+,
G o^
%,
verbs take two objects in the Accus.
Many
especially Exclamations *
is
"Zaid with his brother". l.t3 Oyj,
e.g.
oUik
, *
it
jOrf,
O,
*
b if
"0 Abdallah",
G
word, which is an Attribute sition to another word in the Accus. 1.
no escape from
is
A
Note
e.g.
no doubt",
is
the Conjunction
after i
means "with", 1)
nunation,
ruler of the Faithful 1"
The Noun
k)
its
after the Particle of
followed by a Genitive,
U-^jlT ^J!
loses
no escape", JLi ^ "there
is
xJLs? $) *^JiJI ^, (or
the matter"
281
to
friends
and an agreeable
i.e.
"you
O -
place''; ^Lj-* "slowly",
^J^A\ "go" is understood.
2-
The
3.
Genitive
>
,
or
is
used
iu
the
following: a)
A Noun
which
"
is
connected with another by
^
Annexation (wU3|), see Less.
6, 4.
Note. Arabian grammarians say that the force of one of the prepositions u, o-
or
^5,
e.g.
J^
.i
jo^J
^
Xi^/tot,
1,5^X1 '
,
o
1
*X^ = >
(^UJ "the boy who 60, "a garment i*.^; !
has the
(belongs) to Zaid"; o,o
of
silk';
5 Z
"the prayer of sunset".
Vj*
'
'
Second Port.
282
b)
A Noun
(^ ^j>} see Less. 44.
after a Preposition
A
Noun which is an Attribute of or in Appoanother in the Genitive. In connection with a) it should be noted that some nouns combined with a Genitive in Arabic correc)
sition to
to English Adjectives,
spond
3^
1)
o.
fjj
i
"whole",
i.e.
"all, *
.
JJ" "every
day
Js^f,,
;
Adverbs
"
{,
every,
men"
city";
^
"everyone who"; U ]s "aU that
JJ"
Similarly
**=>
>
e.g. (jJJJ?
Go-'
2)
*(JL$
,jaju
J^
or
,0.0
^f
(also
idbtf
properly "a part",
LT^O;
for "all",
men".
"all
QajJ "one of the poets"
e.g.
,
(Rel.)".
and &$ "whole" are used
^iLT
i.
juuxlt Jj' "the
;
whole
yJJJl
:
-
i
^S "each
a^
etc.
the whole",
i.e.
i.e.
"one,
some",
e.g.
"a certain poet" or
"some
poets". Q O 3) JjLo "likeness" corresponds to the English "as,
like",
e.g.
jjj
JJU "like Zaid",
"like
idi*
him", or
"as he". 4)
^^
properly "an other"
means
"except", e.g.
science" jjjjf "except 5)
"an other than" often corresponds j*L properly
to the prefixes non-,
non-Arab";
^1* "
6)
Gen. Accus. E.g. gjjb-^rt (cf.
Less. 7,
& 1).
^
un-,
im-
etc.,
e.g.
L-ytIT
^i
"a
"im-possible".
#*-^
^-^JL^
..
both .
Fern.
"both the men";
U^ir
"they both"
283
Forty-second Lesson.
many of
"a
7) Ctj
by an
Indefinite
Noun,
i.e.
"many "
vJ^Jil OsS f* '
a" always followed
e.g.
Vj
Jw>j'
manv
man have
a noble
I met".
Emphasis.
4.
A
a)
Repetition (JJaSfT js-^LJjf "literal emphasis"),
noun can be emphasised by:
''he
*[=> 'fj
"I
The use
b)
came running
saw thee" of
(cf.
special
jUb
(Plur.
^
Such words
x**sixj
of
"
'
f '
The words Emphasis
(see
^13)
(Plur.
8' ,
5
JJ',
5-^*> and KsU
above
Oa
3,
are:
1
"self
x*ii j^j zL> "Zaid himself came". say
3).
(^jjuil OvJ'UJt
"emphasis according to the sense"). ,JJ5) and
(quickly)".
Less. 43,
words
e.g.
,
e.g.
One can
also
-
used
are also
for
1).
The Permutative.
(ixln "the substitution") 5)
The Permutative must
follow immediately the jo
word
for
which
it
is
substituted
(*.;
)
, p.o
OvXi!)..
There are four kinds of substitution: a)
(j^IT
^
The
substitution
JjO? ixl)
equivalent to the
j
i.e.
word
of the whole for
the whole
where the Permutative for
which
it
is
is
exactly
substituted, e.g
"Zaid, thy brother came";
gecoud Part.
284
"the
the
city,
b)
came
the great and the small,
The
part
is
people of
to me".
substituted for the whole
((jzauJ!
JjJ
e.g.
xLS "kiss him the hand" j v_ju Jt jw/i
"he ate the
i.e.
"kiss his hand";
half of
loaf,
it"
i.e.
"he
ate the half of the loaf". c)
A
possession or quality
name (&*&&[! i3o
i.e.
is
substituted
for the
Permutative of inclusion"),
e.g.
garment pleased me"
i.e.
'
J ye, *
joy
f)
o^
vXjj
, ,
og
^*>-^!
"Zaid,
his
v^^^ssOwo "I garment pleased me"; Ijyjj praised Zaid, his beauty" i.e. "I praised Zaid's beauty".
"Zaid's
d) (JaiiS!
&JL*s>
A
word
is
used to correct the previous one
^ Jo "the Permutative of error"), e.g.
"I passed
(j*o s-Jio
by a dog (no, I mean) a horse". Exercise
79.
XJLJ
Jo
"^
xi!
c>>^U->
'i-*J
-^j^
285
Forty-second Lesson.
JliJi
3^-
.
J^
3
yil
xj^
LX^ olyuaJl
Ji
Second Part.
286
r5 ^ L (used as
an exclamation) fJaJ| (be comforted!)
jJfflj
ll^e
tJt
^
^
t
V^>
^
3y> ^ wJ?
ill!
Exercise 80. It
is
necessary
to
is no escape necessary that I give thee The captain was extremely
go away (there
It from going away). what thou demandest.
is
astonished at what (Co) had happened to me. sea was calm and the atmosphere
I travelled in the direction of
still.
Egypt and you pray
clear
(3tl)
God
travel
in
that he
The
and the weather
(making
for SJaa
the direction of Syria.
may
I
bring you safe to your
We
country. wept bitterly and that hour was a That man was intelligent, pious, very grievous hour. of noble character, of noble soul. Verily calamities do not cease following me, since I went out from the She sighed in despair (the sigh of the despaircity.
and her sighing was increasing my pain and I have no (me as to pain and sorrow). We have only death power to withstand calamities. ing)
sorrow
before
us (there
Throw us both
is not before us except death). into the sea, or preserve us both.
Since the main purpose (most important of purposes) of our high dynasty is the rooting out of the causes of encroachment and of evil by sea and land, we are legally
on
all
and morally compelled ships of the Corsairs.
to (that we)
make war
287
Forty-third Lesson.
Forty-third Lesson.
Pronouns. o 3.
The Personal Pronoun (jt+*o)
is
either
Independent
and may be in the Nomi-
or Suffixed (cf. Less. 8, 1), native or the Accusative.
For the Independent Pronoun see Less. Note.
^ the
fixed to_^S> or 3.
O "and",
If the conjunctions ^,
sometimes loses
its
The Independent Pronoun
6.
3,
6 "verily" are
vowel,
_^,
e.g.
pre-
^s
etc.
in the Accusative is
as follows: 3.
Masc.
j
him. her.
3. Fern.
lfl>j
2.
Masc. SCt thee.
2.
Fern. ^JU
U]
them both
UflT[
you both
IfCt you.
4. a)
With a verb
"vsHjj
b) If >
e.g.
a
U
^U
in the Accus.
is
used: e.g.
two Pronouns are Direct Objects of a verb, - o
J^LLft!
"he
gave
it
me";
(to)
but
it is
also
oS
a Verbal Noun, him". c)
-
emphasise the Pronoun,
to
possible to say xollacf.
(to)
us
Kj
"Thee we serve".
-
after
"a
^Cj
^tj me. The Independent Pronoun
j>l*jtj
them.
^bj r
"s
1.
?uj
It is also
e.g.
used as the Object
JLJott
C| ^
"my
giving
Independently as a Warning, without a verb,
"take carel", see Less. 48,
2.
it
e.g.
Second Part.
288
For the Suffixed Pronoun see Lees.
5.
Note ,3.
The
1.
"my Lord I"
letter
(cf.
^5
Less. 48,
3.
2,
Note),
and in the Pronoun
J,, e.g.
>*
>*
(for
"fear me".
JsjSi
Note 2. The Pronoun a a is
1
8,
for often omitted in the cry v.^
is
often refers to a whole sentence
s
and
i
then called a ^L*J! j*+te',
translated "it" or omitted in
it is
translation.
6. If the Personal Pronoun is to be emphasised it repeated in the Independent form, whether it has already been contained in the verbal form or expressed is
as a Suffix, struck me".
e.g.
\&AJO "I struck",
fi|
The Emphatic Pronoun
^jfo "he
Gt
"myself, himself" etc.
ex-
is
pressed by the use of U*AS (Plur. (j^aJt), ^xt (Plur. S G ^ o or oU> (Plur. ofy>) with the Pronominal suffixes .,
(cf.
Less. 42, 4
b),
e.g.
himself; so also ^^-ijf
Jw
or x*-^j
x**aj
"the
($?.
matter
"Zaid this
itself,
same matter".
The Reflexive Pronoun
7.
o
,
o^
in the Accus.
is
also ex-
r-,
pressed by ^^^j, ^AC, oto (with their Plurals) and the
Pronominal If the
suffixes, e.g. j^wii
jJs "he
Pronoun depends on a
killed
t o
enough
to use the
Pronominal
himself".
suffix, e.g.
>
-
LA
-
J,
is
it
Preposition,
p -
5
oJe>l
"1 took something for myself". 8.
The Reciprocal Pronoun "one another" is expressed
#.-*..-*'-
o,
by the use of ^a*j "one, some", "we have helped one another". G
After peated, e.g.
Prepositions
the
e.g.
ui*j
'uL*i=ju
'Jj^Lw
o-
^>aj
need
not
be
re-
Forty-third Lesson.
r
(
^Ju*jJl
Ijj
"the
289
soldiers
approached
one another". 9. For the Demonstrative Pronoun and the Interrogative Pronoun see Less. 9 for the Relative Pronoun see Less. 31. ;
Exercise SI.
&..
Ug
5-
^
S
,>-*-
o'liuxll J^it
ju|j^ UoLaS'
-
Joa L*
Uu
OS
^
o,
Q^
lil
,
L,
ik>
o/ c^il J
U
*
1
L^
U>Lj
^UJt
^^JiL
Arabic Grammar.
j
fH^i
, ,o
Second Part.
290
Exercise 82.
You have manded
ourselves have
com-
The beggar demanded an alms from
this.
us and we gave
You
We
struck us.
will
him. My giving it was yourselves to destruction.
it
offer
(a)
good.
You
have demanded the same matter as we have demanded. The two parties were entangled with one another. Those shepherds asked me if I was the person sought. I began to comfort myself and cheer my spirit - (raise myself) with vain hopes. Truly, what has befallen me is by reason of my deceiving thee. Let us throw ourselves into the sea and die at once. The captain commanded a sailor to separate us from one another. Remember my freeing thee from the hands of the robbers.
Forty-fourth Lesson. Particles. O o1.
The
2.
The
are divided into Prepositions, (^_iy>) Adverbs, Conjunctions and Interjections. Particles
Prepositions.
Preposition
is
called O
by a
verned
preposition i
with
its
noun
>
O
^c,
is
~^\ Jy>-, the word go>'o
,
^^*, and
the preposition
,>
i.
is
^yfd^ jL=M. A. Inseparable, consisting of Prepositions are: one letter always attached to the following word; B. Separate, which stand alone and are either true particles or nouns in the Accus. 3.
A. inseparable Prepositions. 1)
uj "in, by. with"
Verbs
denoting
"to
etc.
adhere",
"begin", are construed with
[jo "to begin with".
o
e.g.
"attach", /sic.
"to
"seize",
hang on",
Forty-fourth Lesson.
"To in
believe in"
^
is
291
e.g. *JjC
^\,
vJUT
"To swear by" swear by
my
After
vj
is
^J,
Sometimes the verb
head".
^
"See! Behold I"
lot
^|^ ^^^\
e.g.
Nom. may be used), e.g. Behold a man came (or Jo-j ^J). In negative sentences, often prefixed to
is
y
u^lfc
ylJ he U they
j?
Many
a thing,
e.g.
is
not a rider
i.e.
omitted.
jj
is
ji-j?
&
a noun,
(or
are not aware (or
are followed
which the motion
jt
the predicate
if
it,
intransitive verbs of
when they
tive,
is
"I
used (but the noun
is
alone in the
vj
"I believe
God".
refers,
he brought
^
(This vj Of
transi-
and the object
$>**
e.g.
it.
^
Note. The expression
motion become
by
Jt he is
to
came with
called AJjuJcft *U)
S
oaf ^L means
"at the price of
my
father thou art to be redeemed", i.e. "thou art so dear to me, that I would redeem thee at the price of my father". (This is called
JujJxi
2)
and
!
*L,
the ba of redemption.)
o
3)
and
'$
"by" hi an oath,
"by God", (o occurs only in
&&
however a verb 4) J "for,
& sion
is
(=
is
to,
e.g.
: dS and
this expression.)
used in the oath,
o
must be used.
because of".
used to express the Dative and denotes posses"have", see Less.
8,
5).
As a Conjunction
it
If
(with the Subjunctive of the verb) denotes "in order that, so that". 19*
Second Part.
292 It
denotes the English "of, G
o,
determinate noun,
e.g.
JojJ * '
G
^oLo
follows an in-
it
v^ a
friend
DO ^
me
of
f
(belonging
one
of
my
used especially for the editor of a book,
e.g.
Zaid";
to)
a
when
,
J,
i.e.
friends. It is
*W"
^*2tt of
(i.e.
jot)
and
denotes
Cause,
"for
the
benefit of"
(opposite
of
so denotes a creditor (j^ the debtor), e.g.
f^> v_J j It
Stories of the Prophets
written by) Tha'labl. also
,3
u^*^ The
tikllc
vi,
thou owest
me
a thousand dirhams.
used to denote the Purpose and the
also
is
e.g. >
I
Js
for this reason, therefore.
.
iJ JJ Note
I
3
1.
Passive, "to
Note
3
o'j'
2.
^
e.g. a)
p e rs.),
e.g. *I,
after the particle of address
J^
(&&>)
changed to
is
1st
especially in the
"to say to" often means,
name",
call,
(except with the to
rose to help him.
be was
(is)
called.
before Pronominal suffixes
i3
l^
U
It
etc.
e.g.
is
v^sSJJ
L
also
changed
"0 wonder",
^
Jojj
L 5)
"O
Zaid!"
3
"as,
prepositions,
(i.e.
like"
is
although
"similarity", e.g. It is
-come and help
joj?
usually it
is
Zaid!).
counted
really
a
among
the
noun meaning
"like Zaid".
not used with Pronominal suffixes.
293
Forty-fourth Lesson. B.
Separate Prepositions.
1) lj "to, unto, until". nearly related in meaning to ^ and serves to
Is
express motion towards a place, iJjjCtl
he came
sLa-
j,f
In relation to time a certain point of time, *loofcST
tLph\ Si
Notice specially
"and so
16)
With
It
is
to
Q, from beginning to end. ^5 (abbreviated
"to him",
j^- "up
used with
gjf
,
see Intro
to,
"Jl
"to me", etc.
as far as".
suffixes.
sometimes used to mean "even" and then no influence on the case of the following
L^
J&> iX^J? vilf?
word, -e.g. even its head".
3)
With
up
forth", "et caetera".
2)
exercises
expresses continuance
e.g.
^M
sufiixes: xJjt
Is not
it
e.g.
to the city.
jc
ate
the
fish,
"over, on, against".
suffixes: *llc
Used of
"I
"on him";
($*& j*
place.
he
J^ "on me"
etc.
on the way.
sat at table.
a city on a
river.
Notice specially: t^jb
j*
^
&'^S>[
o
IJaj'
to look (with pleasure)
}
>
to
at
examine into a thing.
a thing.
Second Part.
294
iudc (or
'i
-J^i)
he fainted
(lit.
it
was made
dark upon him). ojo*,
>,,
Peace be on you! (the greeting of
fXJlc j.XvJ!
Moslems
one another, the answer being ..^LJl
to
&Iic
x^
ajff
&IL.
jJL^
Jj|
ftlL
God
jjj
peace (see Intro.
Used
^Xlitj).
God's mercy be upon him.
him
give
blessing
and
16).
in a hostile sense:
-j:>
he went out
war) against him.
(to
So with verbs denoting anger:
was angry with
tiUlc OVA^CC I
thee.
Used with Adjectives: a-/J*
"To
^ J^
6-
O
o ,
v_^suo
( J^w)
,
incite to" ,j^
Jdr
tie
also
is
I
i
dU -3 that
cx>;
is
too hard (easy) for me.
"to induce to" jst j^, e.g.
have induced him to
(do)
something.
used to indicate that a burden, duty
or debt lies on one, e.g. , ^
Jkc vc
\}
0*
(jto^s
v^?.
a duty incumbent on a man.
it is
the duty of such
o io^ you owe me ^
.
this (see A, 4).
cT-
Jvc Jv*u5 a preference over.
Common
expressions with
jfi gU? according to
o J^ t
j*
are:
...
on the supposition
and such a one.
that.
Forty-fourth Lesson
295
so far as possible.
bring him here to me. lit:
on the head and
-
tlie
e^ e)
willingly, with pleasure.
conjure thee by God.
I
^
4)
With lie
^1^ "from me";
etc.
Used of place verbs denoting to hinder,
il^ "from him",
suffixes:
"from us",
"from, instead of".
=
away from, and avoid,
flee,
defend (with
so is used with restrain oneself, forbid,
of these verbs
many
^
can be
used), e.g.
^ ^c ^^
(or s
-
to prevent
.1*
(or
to avoid
vwixs^
J O"*^ o^
....
^ e ^en d someone or some-
^
'**^
from
....
thing. It
reveal,
is also used with verbs meaning open and ask, e.g. *.
J^
QC
0,05 o, *.^ .\ Ooi^
to
^jt^iS
o-
-f-
to ^c. JLv
to
uncover,
uncover something. ask
about someone or
something. In the sense of the Latin de "concerning", it
To
is
e.g,
told concerning Solomon.
indicate the source of information, e.g.
^iLsl Q* ash-Shafi'l.
lf=>
it
is
told
on the authority of
Second Part.
296
It
used
sometimes
is
of
time,
e.g.
voy>
QC-
him
(see
"shortly, soon". Notice specially:
ST '^o} May God be
11^ Intro.
pleased with
16).
^
apart from.
^Le
"in".
5)
With It
*o
suffixes:
expresses rest in place or time
questions "where?" and "when?", house, iilljl
JsJ>
Sometimes - )9*
*
^1
J,
it
e.g.
and answers the J |3jT &
in
the
in this year.
motion to
expresses
a
place,
e.g.
into the cistern.
fell
jj>5
denotes "among",
It also It is
e.g.
^ who among us.
*
-.
g
.....
speak about
to
-&
LLo
used with verbs of speaking and thinking:
....
to think over ^
J^obf
to consider something.
Also after the verbs of desiring: for
etc.
~~
he
3,
^
me
in him, ~& in
something;
^
r
J
"To multiply by" iiSls
6)
With
jJ,
with him,
is
v-Jytot
^jJ,
suffixes
to
_h
^
,3
v ^; 1
*
after.
v-j-xa,
e.g.
multiply three
by seven.
5jJ "with" (Latin "apud").
aJLxJ
^xl
yearn
with him, J,jJ with
with me;
is
rarer than
me
etc.;
Forty-fourth Lesson.
With It
^)
(rarely
5^8
7)
'297
"with".
suffixes xLs with him,
^
with
me
etc.
denotes association in place or connection in
time, e.g.
lL he travelled with me.
^x
I
means
It often
XeLw (j^ It also
Lo^
came
to thee at sunrise.
have something with one",
"to
e.g.
have a watch with me.
I
translates the English "besides", e.g.
besides his being a stranger.
he went out from the It is
used with verbs denoting
to
go
tent.
out,
to free,
to fqrbid:
yL't
me) from
^
B1I
J^cl
take refuge in
I
God
(to
evil.
Used of time: cr
Sometimes used
from mornin g
(like
j^)
^, since two years
to i.e.
to evening.
mean
"since".
two years ago.
free
Second Part. It is also
employed witn verbs and nouns denoting
nearness, as iL,
^ji
0^3
e.g.
I
approached the enemy.
6
near us.
3
Notice specially: xi/> o
*
e>
s^
l
he sold to him.
',
..a,-..
Q^ (v^j')
v^
wonder
to
at
something;
so with other verbs of feeling:
^
'
e
o
to rejoice at
^i 1*
.....
}
Q. J?;**** pleased at ......
The word "than" ty
after a
is
Comparative
expressed
e.g.
Ir; ~ O
.
OiO
"A
^
J
_.
O
JC
Q, e ^1 swifter than the dog.
v.JlXJi
certain"
often expressed oy cr preceded
is
by
a word indefinite in the Sing, and followed by the
same word
definite in the Plur. e.g.
a certain merchant. It is also
used partitively
noun
in the Plur. or quantity, e.g.
definite
number
o
~A
o j ^S
0
'
U what you have done us in the way of kindness
you have done
Is not It is
i.e.
the
which
kindness,
us.
9) jJJ, 5J> "since" used with suffixes.
(for
^3
^,).
sometimes followed by the Nominative,
.20.0
o,
.
?
\>
>
JUO)
JU/>
*>-
-
-
I sat
with (beside) him.
Used of time:
h e came fj&> ^ic d->
jw^iJ! It is
iu
often used with the
^
(or
Note.
ttXi^
or
J,)
^kXic means
^
12) (jto^c (or
oj^i
iy
over,
(opposite of
"on,
I
"to have".
meaning
have wealth.
"according to
Itojc)
tiU5 otolr: tJ^P 13)
I
^OOLC
at sunrise.
''instead
my of,
opinion
it is
so".
in place of":
took this in place of that.
above":
of place
and rank
o^?):
a^wixJl viVllt
-*js
on the
tree.
ijs above the king
(in rank).
14) JJ3 "before" of time (opposite of JsjJ):
oi*Il 15)
Jjo
jbJ! 16)
^ J.5JO
^
before the birth (of Christ).
"before" of place (more often *UI): before the house.
"towards":
o-iJl j^? towards the West. Note,
j^
is
used as a substantive in
all
Cases with a
following Genitive in the sense of "like" or "about". o, jo- Oja like Zaid.
j^
^
Jc?.,
man
Second Part.
302
J^.
AJlo
>s=o o. -A I passed by about a hundred men.
on the
17) s]jj "behind,
far side
of:
behind them. behind (on the 5.
Two
case, if the
^
L** cr
mountains.
In this prepositions often occur together. second was originally a noun, it must be
put in the Genitive, JJU.J
far side of) the
e.g.
from between them i.e. from the midst of them. fr
m
ver
i.e.
from under
above.
i.e.
underneath.
from with. cr from on
^ or
o j)Jo
i.e.
down
from.
without.
before. ij^ cr, after.
Exercise 83.
xUJ *JOUc
^Las
^ yolj Uj" oJo^ A)
ifiiLLw
L^JC?.^'
^50!
i^SU
Jlsj
jijJ!
^i *J
/Jo'
Forty-fourth Lesson.
03
_
XxS
xJLc
ilf
,
UG
3 ?
JlJ
^
iS
L
Second Part.
304
U
A]
oc^w* Jo
Exercise 84. I
have
(in)
able joy (what
this is
day experienced
indescrib-
(jtiUs)
not described in the
way
of joy).
I shall speak to thee about this matter I was (^U;). very disturbed on examining your letter which came
(o^
Part. Act.) to his Excellency our lord
(the excellency of our lord the father),
and father
may God
protect
him!, and although I almost turned away (in spite of my being I turned away) from the mind of his Excellency what disturbed him, yet I was not able to content my thoughts with the least (of what is) possible, and for this reason I find myself disturbed (of the mind), hoping that you will honour
noured
Verbal
Noun
of
by
^Jjuj
formation (sJbl); and we pray ance of health and wellbeing.
me
for
(the
being ho-
giving
me
in-
you the continnu-
What
I
have learnt
Forty-fifth Lesson.
305
of thy indisposition hps grieved me, and I have prayed God that He will clothe thee with the garment of recovery, for He can do all things (He over every thing is powerful). Perhaps our lord will bring thee what The sheikh was extremely astonishwill rejoice thee. ed at our answer.
Lesson.
Forty-fifth
Adverbs. 1.
Adverbs are either 1) Particles, Inseparable or Nouns used only in the Nom. or Accus.
Separate, or 2)
Inseparable Particles. 2.
The Ad verbs, which
are Inseparable Particles are:
a particle used to indicate a question
a) 1
(=
see Less. 2, 5) (called the -Ljfcu-^T ); but only
no Interrogative pronoun occurs |jJ
(or viiii j^)
but
to
\Sj>
JJ
in the sentence, e.g.:
Jjbi! hast thou done this?
^
who has done
pf
I in a double question; see
b)
a particle used
tj
to
the Imperfect (see Less. 13,
form of
Jl
(xLxil
c)
J^p
when
this?
^t.
give a Future meaning 4).
It
is
a shortened
"at the end".
O^MW) xbtdLw I shall do
it.
5 a particle used for Emphasis, "certainly, truly",
often omitted in translation, Arabic Grammar.
e.g.: 20
Second Part.
have done
truly. I
j
Especially with the
it.
Modus Energicus
(see Less. 15):
ejJLutoS I shall certainly strike thee.
Also in an Oath:
3
often used before the Predicate of a
is
which begins with
sentence, It
life.
by thy
dj*ju
often
is
^
(see
Nominal
below 3e).
used to introduce the apodosis of a
sentence beginning with ^J (see Less. 47,
5).
Separate Adverbial particles. 3.
The most important
a)
and KM yj[
separate particles are: to
(related
1,31,
see Less. 46,
2b)
1
"in that case, then' let
y\
b)
sentence
(for
e.g.:
us go then.
and
1
"not"
3)
in
an
Interrogative
:
US
Particle of Interrogation (see Less. 2, 5).
jjdta
J^
haet thou done
In an indirect question ^y^^IsAJ?
^&
,3^*3-1
it
it.
denotes "whether",
me
tell
e.g.:
whether thou hast
expected me.
$&
(for jJ>
Up
x)
and ^) "not" in an
"here",
or in
Interrogative sentence.
a strengthened form uib>
(sometimes written U$P).
y)
and iiJU? "there" Nouns used as Adverbs.
nouns, the Accusative of which are used as Prepositions, are used as Adverbs and are then
Many
4.
Indeclinable ending always in u, e.g.:
U
o'
or
"not yet".
jJs^ "before". '
^^
^^
"whither".
"wherever".
"above".
1 "below".
cr "whence".
^
in the ex P ression
"nothing
else,
^*
only this".
5. Most nouns used as Adverbs are employed in the Accusative (see Less. 42, 2, c, e), e.g.: little".
U
^LJLs
"seldom"
"much, very". "often".
~*l3
^,^ IJRX
ik^
^ -
verv T
"inside".
"outside".
"together". "altogether". f "for ever" (with
!
neg. "never").
310
Second Part.
"by day".
i.L^j '-
"
^
^L^ "on the right hand".
"one day, once".
ol
' '
"on the
tl
O^i^
"time") in
j&*&- "then,
"at that time".
XXrJt "altogether".
one time
at
jo,
"alone"
I alone, aJos^
Note.
is
he alone,
e.g.
oJ
suffixes,
e.g.
etc.
^^-^
etc.,
and jjJ "perhaps"
!J
with
For some Verbs which are usually translated into
English by Adverbs as
jj:
used
at another time.
see Less. 30.
are often used with suffixes,
perhaps he, JkJ (rarely ^^al) perhaps
"would that" with
xX-J (rarely
suffixes &;oJ
^^1 whould that
I.
I.
would that
he,
Forty-fifth Lesson.
311
Exercise 85.
&* cr 34-
USli
L
?
V
1
^
t>
LolL
Lit
jc^J!
olLl?
U
Second Part.
312
t
Q^Diitt
liiLi
^f
,utttJf
^)0o
LLM fJ^[s
y\
oju
i*3i
v^OLfii
JJ^ f ^^^^
viJUl ul UiL
il^o
i^XJo
%^s-
Oo
f
1
L5->^*l5 ^-^j^
^?
jx 'uij^f
o^,
iii
Truly, he can both speak and write the Arabic language (he knows the Arabic language speaking and Permit me to see from time to time that writing). friend Sa'ld. You Jainila said: Art Sa'id? and he said Yes.
trusty slave, nay rather the true must have patience my friend.
thou trusting in that O hope that (Perhaps that) the journey will be pleasant to you, for the land of Egypt is a cheerful land especially I beseech thee by th in the winter season. head of thy father, that thou deliver me from this trouble and command thy men to carry me from this place whither you wish. He gave us permission to dwell, One party of us travelled wherever we might wish. northwards and a party of us travelled southwards. The prince said: Is she the How can that be? I
princess
Salma?
He
said:
Yes
prince.
Then
the prince turned pale (the paleness came upon SLc The best is that we return the face of the prince).
where we were. Bonaparte (o^Li^j) journeyed from Egypt secretly to his country in the latter days of the year 1799 A. D., then the Mamlukes and the people of Egypt prepared together to fight the French, and they were not able only to drive them out of it. to
Forty-sixth Lesson.
313
They two journeyed together to the pkce where he had Some of prepared for them what was necessary. the inhabitants of the village came to us and began to ask us "Whence?" and "Whither?" I alighted then from the back of my horse. I said to her: What do you think? Shall we show enmity and resist them, or not? And she said: No, we shall not resist them. And I said: What shall we do (is the deed)? Shall I hand over to them my weapons and myself, that they
take
may
me
captive,
and perhaps
kill
me?
Forty-sixth Lesson.
Conjunctions.
The Conjunctions
1.
are
either
Inseparable
of
Separate.
The Inseparable .
and
a)
b) s
are:
and ^J "and"
(called in
Arabic v_Lc
"particle of union".
v_j,
two independent words or sentences, while
joins
5
which usually joins sentences only,
indicates
a
development in the narrative and may often be transIt is also generally used lated "and so" "and then". to join two sentences when there is a change of subject.
With a following verb
in the Subjunctive
o means
"so that". For see
2
o
as
with the Predicate of Nominal sentences with
f.
Por'O in ^13
means
U
the Apodosis of Conditional sentences see Less. 47, 5.
with a following Nominal sentence or a Suffix "for".
Second Part.
314
between two sentences, of which the second
^
a Nominal sentence often means sentence introduced by 3 tence of condition", e.g.: JS
Jsj;
>
viJb
also with
is
Such a
G, o > Gs called a iJJL> ^Ju> "sen-
is
) (
.,, GO- -,
o,
"while".
Zaid stood up, while he wept (Zaid stood
/
up weeping).
change of Subject: GO,, GO, - -
,
Zaid went away and 'Ainr f
remained
Amr
(while
remained).
The follows ,
^
is
usually dropped,
when
a Verbal sentence
:
Go, jo:
o ,
.
(^^*iij
zL> Zaid came,
while
he laughed
(laughing).
The waw
of Condition
$^\
is
sometimes used
Nominal sentence which has no
before a
Imperfect Go,
Participle or
:
,^Go, sL> Zaid came, and in his hand
yi
a sword (with a sword in his hand). For
as Preposition with Accue.
_5
with the Genitive see Less. 44, 3 A,
For c)
=
_j
j "so that"
with" see Less. 42, 2 e. 3.
(for the Prep, j see Less. 44, 3 A, 4)
with following Subjunctive: -
^ .,0-0
(3U!
demand
>
o *
v-Jdj-J
J,sL> he
the wealth
(to
came
demand
to
me
so that he
oE
With negatively:
same meaning are used ^.^
the^ !^
!
,
^LlXJ
might
the wealth),
"so that not".
& ,
jjj;
and
Forty-sixth Lesson.
315
3 with the Jussive (nearly always in the 3 rd Person)
demand:
expresses a
,_^Lj
him
let
write
I
With the particle sJ the (see Less. 14, 3).
loses its vowel:
The usual Separable Conjunctions
2.
are:
because" with following
"when, since, after, Verbal sentence.
a) ot
wJ&Jb
r
if" originally
"when,
b) 16!
of condition (see Less.
in
47);
used of time, but often indirect
questions
=
"whether".
and
31
mean
also
lot
"behold!", in which case the
always followed by a Verbal sentence, the latter by a Nominal sentence in which the Subject is either in the Nominative or takes (see Less. 44, 3 A, 1): former
is
^
o .
(^) ^ o
~
>
jo
,
'
.
y[
"if,
man camel
j
means "whenever" c)
behold, a
}
jo!
(see Less. 47).
whether" introduces Conditional sentences
or indirect Questions (see Less. 47).
= " verily if o 5 means"and if, even if, although". C7^J ?
Note. &
juo*c|
There oE lycl
is , o
LAX
'.
also a particle of Denial y[, e.g.: > os o 1
vi>uL
...t
I
have not seen anything of
her, that I despise.
d) 5] (for
is
^t
and
5C
i)
"and
has the following meanings: not"
"otherwise".
1)
"if not",
2)
"except, only" preceded by a negative.
called a
zJi^\ J!>
i.e.
if
i.e.
(This
^
"particle of exception"), e.g.:
Second Part.
316
2? ^1 e)
lt\
*K (for
f)
'
-
no god except God
(Allah).
C) only in:
)
"either
\
or".
ui |
with a following Nominative, the
"as for"
Ui
is
and
^1
H
^ ufc
$ there
Predicate being always strengthened with a o, e.g.: C, *>OS-o > * ^ *9 - SS 1*1 as f r Mt. Hennon, .\*l& j^s- _^s g^-55 *>
J^
a
it is
lofty
(jj^kJf
him on
mountain.
j
ajL^* vsJbJ!
the road.
U
as for the dog,
I
met
(According to Arabian grammarians
vlsij? is the Subject, all the rest is Predicate.) f "that" with following Verbal sentence, the g) verb being rarely in the Perf., nearly always in the Imperf. Subjunctive (cf. Less. ,17, 6 a).
^=
^
"as though";
With Negative: 31 "so that not".
(for
h) ^5 "that" with a being in the Indicative.
With 'JJ!
suffixes:
"because".
^T
and
^) "that not"; 5ii
Nominal sentence, a
21 "that
he",
^f or
j.1
later
verb
"that I",
or Qf "that- we" etc.
In
Note
1]?
the suffix
is
often JULi? '^Jo
(cf.
Less. 43, 5,
2).
In compounds: ?.
"just as
if",
"it is
as
if".
Forty-sixth Lesson.
^ ^,
Q*
"except that, yet",
U
"or"; jf
3!
i)
"because".
A
^1
With
the
817
"either
Subjunctive
^
or"
(see
means
above
"unless
e).
that,
until that".
Ulo
j)
(more rarely
JLs
1)
&s> "until"
(
~J
(= o?
^1);
by
^.
with a Nominal sentence
J.
^
m)
"while",
"then, thereupon" often followed
k)
often
iJLo)
or
J^jG
"in
order
with
that"
folio whig
Subjunctive.
With Negative n) Jj\J
and
*f
and il*J "hi order that
not".
^& "but", the former being followed by a
verb or noun in the Nominative, the latter only by nouns in the Accusative or Pronominal suffixes: *I*J "but he",
^yld o)
or
"but
^JXJ
LJ "when,
translated usually p) _jJ "if"
I",
llki or lk! "but we".
after"
by the
with following Perfect to be Pluperfect.
in Conditional sentences referring to a (see Less. 47).
mere supposition
with the meaning "would ^f JJ often nouns and pronominal suffixes:
^=
''although".
With Negative: q) is
U
that!" before
UJJ; $Jj;
"so long as" (kj*j JJT
often used in
py'"if
not",
U "the U of
compound Conjunctions:
continuance"),
Second Part.
318
U jJu
"after".
Ulu and
UAJ>
"while".
U
,jJi
"before" (always with the Imperf.).
It is
often used also to generalise, e.g.:
U3I
I
U
"whenever".
^yl*'
UJ[
"whenever".
Lilf "as often as".
"if ever". )
In these cases it is followed by the Perf. or the Juss. in the sense of the Present. r)
s)
jo
"when",
JCL* or
t\x>
Lo
-*x
"whenever".
"since".
Exercise 87.
LJLs &I
o
cr
-,,o
,c
!
A-JLc
*J
j^, J3
'ui!!
A]
to
l^JLij JJJ
JeL
319
Forty-sixth Lesson.
UJI
11
4*
Lattt
j,
iLir oliUf
^Lj
J^c
joiii
liiit
1
iJoLt
JsiJl
"
*5
J
Ub ,
to
^
il ^y9
!jj>
*I
bi
.
!
Second Part.
320 j
o ^
*.
-
U
o jo.S Igti^j ^f *JUi Ojiils ~
sXjLA2t
.
~
ii\J3
,3
j,
e
.Jot
*i)uJ!
I.
L^JU
(UI ^toLaJl
aJ
6ls
^
'*&? "^ Us
JO JU? ^J
uudt
LJ
l
j
^J lots
Exercise 88.
As
she went out of the hall into the inner court, and behold by the side of the door of the No one sees him without being hall a large door. for Jamlla,
Forty-seventh Lesson.
attracted
to
love).
As
him
he
(except, an'd for Sa'ld, he was
321
is
attached by his at the prince,
amazed
because he had not seen during his life a man like And when the prince had determined to jourhim. ney to Egypt, he called his two sons to accompany And while they were so engaged (were in that), him. there was a knock at the door (the door was knocked) I have not seen any good and behold the servant.
And the in my coining that (o) I should return. two, and those who were with them continued travelling, until they came to the pool of the Ezbekiya, and behold a park, which a canal encircled. And it was, when he rode his steed, as though he and the saddle were one piece. While I was examining one of the After books, I lighted upon the following sentence. had
went
chamber. I had not heard the sound of the firing of a gun, and I prepared to defend myself as soon as I should see the first person of them, because it seemed to me that there was no deliverance possible (that there was not of anything which was all
finished
I
left,
my
speech,
possible to us in the
to
when
way
my
(until) I
of deliverance) except that.
do not permit that, so long as thou hast not said to me what thy name is. Before I finished my Inform ine when thou hast speech, I saw my friend. returned hither. Then I commanded Hasan to bring me large stones that we might build for us a fortress safe from the weapons of the enemies. Joy came upon me until from the excess of what rejoiced me, it I
made me weep.
__
Forty-seventh Lesson.
Conditional Sentences. Conditional sentences consist of a Protasis or seno
&
.
tence containing the condition (Jb-i) or
main sentence Arabic Grammar.
(?ff>>
o - , or (jl^s-
=
and an Apodosis "answer"). 21
Second Part.
822 2.
The
(J/Jjf
Protasis
v_3j5>)
o
[
is
or
possible or likely;
introduced by the Conjunction the condition
if
fcM
if it is
by
is
regarded as
purely hypothetical or
impossible. 3. In both parts of the Conditional sentence the perfect or the Jussive may be used in the sense of the English Present or Future.
There are thus four possible cases: a) The perfect is used in both parts , - ,
i
SJM
o , ,
O
o,
,
vi>^o Jo^
:
o
, ,
v_*03
o
Zaid goes
if
I shall
go
with him. b) The Jussive in the Apodosis:
c) The Perfect in the Apodosis:
d)
The
Jussive
Note. After scarcely ever used. is
!3[
is
is
used in the Protasis, the Perfect
used in the Protasis, the Jussive
is
used in both parts
in
a Conditional
With
sense
:
the
Jussive
is
"*i
_jJ the Perfect (rarely Imperf. Indie.)
used in both parts. 4. If
press the Perfect
the verb in a Conditional sentence
meaning of the
Past,
and be preceded by
^
^JiyLf ^JS committed a crime.
jjJjf
it
is to
must be put
in
exthe
'^jf\
js^
excuse (me),
if I
have
The Perfect is used after Jj in the sense of the English Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive or Potential.
may
When it has the meaning of the Pluperfect be placed before it:
*]?
Forty-seventh Lesson.
823
*Li _P
wished, He would have ran 11, 120.) 5. If bis
thy Lord had
if
made men one
the Protasis begins with
o
,
(Ko-
people.
then the Apodo-
must be introduced by
i
.o
(o-^b cr^
>
u
Interjections,
The Vocative
1.
is
Fern, l^ui (but the Masc.
Fem.)_or
the particles b
expressed by is
often used for the
b.
ijjt
,i,Z
-i.e.
,
and l^j| b are followed by the noun in the Nominative with the Article: i$j|
Jo-jGjI l>\ b Less. 42, 1
scholar!
Less. 16,
(see.
4 and
c).
by the noun in the Nominative without Article (and without Nunation in the Sing.) if the perspnaddressed is .present and tne~ noun is not b
followed
is
determined^ by any following words,
jjj
but
S$
b'
b
boy!
O
j^t^
e.g.
b
Mohammed!
boys!
is absent or the noun is or words after it, then 'thjT determined by some word noun is put in the Accusative, e.g.
If the person addressed
:
b
O
ticular person).
careless! (not addressed to
any one
par-
Second Part.
328
ujJLa G
jJ^I
I jJI f
Note
1.
sometimes
is
[>
word begins with
following
->b
climbest the mountain!
Abdallah!
C
!
who
thou,
my
without
written
alif, e.g.
when the
alif,
:
^y>
brother!.
welcome!
Notice specially:
ciot
^
O my
'rf
Note
2.
s!-^-
ending
Note 2.
t^
For
Some 1,
father!
Lord!
The noun (see
3.
1,1,
\
my
[>.
s-et
(see.
Less. 43, 4 Note
that follows
below on
by i
of the
commonest
*\
JuJ\
\2
T,
1,
or sLiLl
1^
O
has the ending
sorrow!
suffixes:
iLj
Alas for
O o-
Go-
^u.
*x>
with suffixes) as Interjections,
Woe The form
tothee.
jjj
JL'
e.g.
See there!
tJli See there he is!
theel O
and
o-
AJ
:
Woe
^LI with the Vocative ending
be used. IP
often
grief!
Alas! also with
(also
4 Note).
\$ Ah!
Notice also the Substantives
used
A
Interjections are:
in pause, e.g.
lL*c>
^
often takes the Vocative
see Less. 44, 3
Oh! The following noun
oder
1).
!^).
L followed
T,
'rf
O mother!
li
to Zaid.
may
also
Forty-eighth Lesson.
LP Come! with
the Preposition
ol^lp Far from Jf,
it
329
o: Come,
let
us go!
I
Fie!
vJI
-o and ^o ;so Bravo! c c* o' u
(Fern, of the Elative vlujLI
or also
j
^1
j^
!^>
(Zx^
\i&
Hail to thee!
and
best") Hail!
in the Plural J^jt "Hither!"
olP (properly the Imper. IV. of
\
"to come")
"give, bring here!" also used in the Fern.
^Jjj and Less. 44,
4U and 3.
(jCJuo
"Beware!"
(from
Perf.
Jj.j
see
4).
Jjlit
"Beware!"
Certain nouns are
Interjections
(cf.
(see Less. 42, 2).
used in the Accusative a$
Less. 42, 2 l,~Note).
Welcome! Strange!
Slowly!
Welcome!
^ Welcome -
^
((lit. (
service
iJ Us Alas 4.
Many
to thee!
"Hearing and obeying".) At your i
for thee!
religious
expressions are
used
interjec-
tionally,- e.g.:
aUt or
JSr LJ
S
or very iffi.
5B?^'
Commonly
By God
!
^1
God!
Second Part.
Thanks
God
If
God!
to
will!
name
In the
of
God
the
Compassionate, the Merciful!
God
or
Jit
forbid!
(lit.
"I take
refuge in God").
There
no might and no
is
power, save in God the Mighty (Expression of astonishment and alarm.) !
What God
if
iiilt
I f
will
!
(Astonish-
ask P ardon of God! (Used
to decline a compliment.) Praises constantly appended to the name of God: |
Praised be He! Exercise 91.
UL>
(Proverb)
viJLai
'ul
Lo
L
Forty-eighth Lesson.
U
^
,5
Ul U oL?
(3
UJ(c
via/
oJ
^J
ef
L
-d- Jo
jT j^Ji
U
^J
Us)
Jif
LI
o
K>J>
fl
idU
381
^eaJ
u
Li
jJu
Second Part.
332
Exercise 92.
Arabs, and follow (Jll) in the track of bold man. Come, let us take a walk in the
Hither, this
Ah, my God, what is this strange chance garden which has united ine with my friend in this raging sea ? Woe, truly misfortunes come upon me and strike me; Ah, why dost thou threaten us, O sea? O would that I had been slain among the Arabs! Praised be the Exalted, the Mighty who has protected us from dangers and guarded us from troubles and brought us back to Beirut safe from harm (Plur.). Ah, O my precious, who has brought thee to this Alas for his (to him from) disturbing dream place? !
!
Forty-ninth Lesson
^
tT^
Arabic Verse.
o^
Prose
1.
Oo is
Poetry
called
(see Intro.
Arabic
j&
("scattering"), O o-
pu
^) o^ An Open syllable (
in
("ordering").
Arabic Poetry
2.
Metre
is
-
or
13,
(J^
Rhymed has both
Prose
is
^s^.
Rhyme
(ilils)
and
the latter being quantitative.
1).
is
short, a
closed syllable long
Forty-ninth Lesson.
The Pronominal
Note. Lit
may be 3.
suffix v
333
and the second
syllable in
either long or short.
Every Verse or Line O
(o^
O
o -
Plur. olL?) consists
- o
of two Half-verses (J&* or
At the end of the Verse i.e. in Pause is dropped and sometimes the vowel
Nunation
(>_aij)
is
the
omitted
altogether.
In long poems the the poem.
half-verse
firet
must end
in the
rhyme of
Sometimes in poems in Rajaz metre (see below 5, b) is no common rhyme, but the first half of each
there
verse rhymes with the second. 4. The number of Feet in use indicated by means of the letters forms of the verb):
is
o
eight.
? 6
are in the
They '(as
b)
c)
d)
e)
b
f)
%***
-^
- -
g)
h)
These Feet are subject a)
b)
L,3jj
-
-
to certain changes, e.g.:
becomes
4jje
-
-
~
Second Part.
~
_ becomes
g) M
If Catalexis
(rejection
,
(rare)
of the last syllable) occurs
at the .end of a verse, then w _ _ is changed to w _; _ _ to These are also subject to the etc.
changes given above.
A or
verse
is
formed by repetition of the same foot
by a combination of several feet. 5. The sixteen Arabic Metres are:
335
Forty-ninth Lesson.
a)
"'"
J
usually with Catalexis _^*s also in the first half- verse:
in
the second,
sometimes
"How many an
evil hast thou warded off, and a dominion hast thou protected so that it
how many became b)
firm."
j>^t
being called
(especially in didactic
sj
"Said Muhammad ibn Malik: God, the best Ruler." In
^
^.
w
poems; such a poem
I
praise
my
Lord
(Beginning of the Alftya of Ibn Malik.) metre Catalexis of the last foot (change
this
_
to
^
rhyme common
-L
)
is
to the
very common.
whole poem, the
also has the Catalexis, e.g.:
If there first
is
no
half-verse
Second Part.
336
"Says he, who hopes in his forgiving Lord, Yaliya ibn Mu'ti Ibn 'Abd-unnur". (From Addurra al-Alftya by Yahya Ibn Abd al-Mu'ti az-Zawawi). c
***
"Poor d)
J^
is
I
the greedy
cr
man,
rich the contented."
(usually with Catalexis in both half- verses)
:
^S 'UojJt
to
"Thrust away the world, for it is of its customs humble the exalted and to exalt him who is low." e)
\j)\ (almost
e.g.:
always with Catalexis):
337
Forty-ninth Lesson.
is
"When thou surpasses! men musk were a part of the
as if f)
j-oixft
(also
whom thou art, it blood of the gazelle."
of
with Catalexis of the second half-
verse):
e.g.:
o-o. 0-*J
my
jj
- G
o
V^S
pi
"My
heart
soul
is
knowest
it
tells
me
that thou art
my
destroyer; it or
whether thou knowest
thy ransom,
not." (
Umar Ibn
al-Fari4.)
g)
At the end of the
first
half-verse
the
^
usually changed to ^ic.^. Catalexis
may
occur at the end of the second
half-verse.
JJ Us
"Stay (both of you), let us weep over the memory of a beloved one and a place at the edge of the sandhill between ad-Dakhfll and Hauraal." (Imru'ulqais.) Arabic Grammar.
22
Second Part.
388
h)
4j"*fi
(sometimes with Catalexis of the second
half- verse):
^j
e.g.:
t
"The soul said to ine: death has come to thee, and thou abidest in the house of rebellion; provide thyself with piety; and I said: cease, provision is not taken to the house of the Generous." (Aba Nuwas.) i)
Jb
^t (often with Catalexis at the end of the
second half-verse):
e.g.:
"Night and the horses and the desert know me, sword and the guest and paper and the pen."
also the
(al-Mutanabbl.)
Forty-ninth Lesson.
839
a> e.g.: .
-a
i E
&
m
"Imagine not that tbou in the future wilt he for the hen has feathers but it does
poetry as we; not fly."
(Ibn ad-Dahhan.)
k)
As a
rule the oS|^*a/>
at the
becomes oiUax, and the
end of each half- verse becomes
X-^JU?
^
"The furthest distance of the fair maid is the miserliness (of her affection), which consists of a distance such as no camel can undertake to travel." (al-Mutanabbl.)
Second Part.
340
"And when passion pervades the heart of a lover then every eye has a proof of it." (al-Mutanabbl.) "
m)
.
u
JJic ^Si
"The youth has intelligence wherewith to live, so far as his foot guides his leg."
The
other three metres
;k=JI,
^ioo^I
and
are not used by the older poets. Exercise 93.
Examples >
,
- jt/t
O.
1
Se
Leas. 30,
5.
of the
more usual Metres.
in
Forty-ninth Lesson.
_.**
1.
O,
-a
cr
^l
AJSJX
L#
used parenthetically "stranRe!"
Uaed as a
triptote
by poetic
license.
341
342
Second Part.
il
*
l
U
r^ir 345
u
See Lees.
7,
2.
u
Forty-ninth Lesson.
(Riddle.)
(Solution:
.s?
f
fix
Exercise
U
94 .
iuL
1
^ A
o
collection of four letters.
See Less. 44, 3 A,
1.
Note.
344
Second Part.
ol
urff oi
lb*t
.;jyT
c
i
345
Supplement, Selections.
From the Koran.
Sura
1.
l!|
X. ft
Sara 112. -O.
.XL
,J
ft
0*
j^Ji
>,
jftl
ft
O
Jc^! &\ .
Z
J>
J
Sura 113.
^
U
^^
ft
131
846
Supplement.
Sura 114.
,5
Fables.
(from
oo
1>J!
kr
jCJLc
1
S!
JliJl
_
U
_
joti
til
U
Jo xli
;3U
I^JlSi
347
Supplement.
to
UlaS
xllij
j
idlftJi
sA# U**J
to' 3 3jJj|
U,
:
i
U
It>i
J
>
i-
A>b
to
LU.U
*JJi'
V '*\
- -oft
sLxAJt
J^JJl
vJjo;
*
to
*J
^'Je
sti'
.-& Joai "j J^^l
U?
348
Supplement.
O K u $% Utj ^3l Ss
iuii
^
ia)d>
Ojl
e^j U-o
wJjJl JjJ
JILJI
I
b jJ'JS.vxi
v^J% jl^
to
oU>
tiUUijJ
I&Jf IvXP (iCl^
'
UiJl ,
to
| l^J
(yUUI j
UP
>
U
J
oJUe /JJ jS
JJii
(From
See Leas. 30,
5.
xj'
iJLJ
f).
349
Supplement.
jiaiu
(
lii
dUo
^I^
^ftxiuto
,jU
d)J
U
xx.lJs.Jl
350
Supplement.
Us
f
Jo
oU
> Jo^S
^15
jSx
iJI,
^UC>
jjU
to li
JJuJJ J-J5 Lu^Lc,
i
All^
^jJ!
)
to
*J
U LJ 6U
s
cr%
Jo ^
i
351
Supplement.
LJLs
Q
o^Jt
^5? J^> g^l J^to iUS v^L,
J^i J]
^
ww
L^J
,^JL>Jo o^xf
oUIl
(From uA*lMl vJukLS by Madame Rosa Sahib.)
^^*
&^o 5
*Jj^
^jo
Lo
LC^J
tf
3
^o^.Ji
,5
U
*
O
l
iul
X*
t^lS
LLi J^sJL
J^JL. v^i^Ji u-Ji^ xtf
1^1
^UDj!
LtiJlil
352
Supplement.
U
jls
xotill
iols
s
J
U.
C)
lkJiJ!
^5 JJI K
c>! J
udL-,
'JiJLLx
!A5>! oJL-,1
u
jfc
^
xS
lo lif
J
li
gjJkJJ
cr
J>
i
-Hs
e
cr
o
e
t p>?-jJl
ttbo,
iL
^Jy-
^
*J
cr
J^l
*J
I^US O
t
353
Supplement.
oJi UiJUax
iJsj>|
v^i*j
Ic
lil
U
UaufiJl
to
^jXJl
LfLo^J
^
Description of Kairo.
(From
y^l
x2x
J
^
lju
KxiSy^ ^^ax^ by
y^
gvJbs?.
Q !JOJ
Oyu gJL>
J.J jj/UiJl
g/>L5J|
^,|yi
Jou
O
Arabic Grammar.
354
Supplement.
O ux
^
j^
Jo
U e; U
ji
I
Ojtf ^jLi
W/
j^Jt
u
VjLi
L
^ JOI
x
cr
1
See Tntro.
17.
355
Supplement.
U
;
v3>s?. '
LgJ
Ju
x
it
isjiJ{
Jii
cr
lax>o
U J
sjJLJt io-i-
U3I
u^^wo ASj
L^o-i
3
'L
356
Supplement.
eUJ J^j.
oic
,jcJ!
,3
lo
LgxuJLS
xJlt
^oK
U.
8j0LfiJf
&*5-SJl
LLJUJ|
/L,
Ui'L
JOLc
i
Jjih***git
iiiuoLs*.
A-w^jJwa
u^>LxJ!
us
Bj5>'lftjS
4*
J
^Lu JOLc
sLo JJis
^ -
Jv*j
$5 L^LyOo
^^^ 'L^/^J !y!c
^
^
4^
!
5
JUJI
^[p- U^au
357
Supplement.
From
uX
the
Romance
idLJJi
jJl jLa
UC
*Ju
UJ! j,l
JyjJl ^Las
Uo! UJ^I swca9
,5
UL,
oUc^S!
L
liJUc
858
Supplement. iudS
8 J^>
,5
J,t
.ot.Liv:^;
x3 U
l^Jis
i
lilxxi-t
j-y-Ji
8jJb ^-
JJJ
liJJsJ>3
J;> J^t
X*
J.
o^!
U^rS
jA**it
ri^J!
,JNJ>
3
^ &\
i^jU! o,
,5
tf
c^a^
U LJU^J
jJLT LinL^-l
JJJI r
^La
-Ato J
lJ^JI
^
JO Jo
f
Q, BL^St
dJLj
jytfl
liUJUIt
aJu^lS
1X
Jc^
Uc
359
Supplement.
j xJu~3
j, fcyCaJf
o/3 UT
LJUcl
UJ J*>
,5
^J
d)JJ tO
^
^.AJIJ
SOo.
^=s
xo
l^o
t
oUT
so^Jl
\^i- Uxj
*
005 ^Ui J,!
jjrX^Jl
Cyo^t>
U^^ls ULa
13^^
S
8p
U tf
xi^
xV
J
cr
J|
coJis
oU
J^-J! J^,!
^ M'^ '4^
'wu^uj, UCc il
^
LJ^3 Juu
c>
Lpls
x
o CT i^
^.Ju-
4 L^jL,
LgaLq
^i
J.I
360
Supplement.
Jo
aul^
v>J>
bUJ! ULo
liJv>
J^ ^ J,!
j
JU ULT, JwiUs
A)
O^u
iOx
Mj'ub
oyllL. lots
oto.fi
j^XJt
UJb
xx-o
J,l
^w
v-^JSi5
*3u*J!
JJis
Jo
a^Ljj
vii^'uos ^3 J
^ o
Li*c
.ijXiu
(J*
*5
^iSJ
*y>!
^
r
bf JC
-
U L^JLc
^ (
361
Supplement.
,5
.IsJl
wlaj
Up^as
U*4i
u,
r
b
&u,
,iXJi
'JJ
,*i
A^O
^JMWO
L>
Uil3
363
Supplement.
Extracts from Journals, 1.
From
the Egyptian journal \j&\. f
LUI
io
^ yk Kiui! iT
XJLiU
L^Jl^Xc
jo
u^^
LLJI
ii^>
^ ^L
xJi
o'uCu\i!!
!
LoUi
LoUi :
-^Jlill
LLJt
.iJb
Lw-JU
JU j
_^IJ &
^LJ^ x^vXi^
A-JL*Ji
Bo'ju-J!
^10
^ A-JLLJUJi
fel^Ji
o
Supplement.
UJJ U
xLs?
cr
io'Lc
J,
jj'UaJl
Xs
L^,Lju-t
367
Supplement
*jUJ!
oL3j All jSU, J^Utt
cr u
cr
cr
LpJJj
^-
L^KU
U&13
cr i
^
JJo J
U c*lj
oLJLkJt
iL
368
Supplement.
2.
From the Syrian
journal 3L^t
O
Ui-o Co
tf
0^*0
O l^
xJLc
U
U^JLsolS t
Jo
^
j
Jo
.xixs.
iC^cuJJ
!^
JJ!
JLJ!
^ OJ5;
U ij^ ij
^o U=>!
xi!
369
Supplement.
iuo'iiii
j
yJUJI
*-Ji
U^I!
.3
^
*Ji*
*JLc
vs^'
^
Ki>
x!
AS,
-bLSjJJj
iUUJl
^JiJt
B!!
(iLJ!
xolkJUJ!
Arabic Grammar.
(jaJiJ!
VJ'JLS.
l
Us JJ
r.
iU^I a, Sj
O
^5
U
870
Supplement.
yi
it
&XAA
syu
*aU0|j
oU
iJjLLj so^U5
fetyitt
J,!jt
871
Supplement.
U x^S u, i
CT
l
sJoUJl
^
Js^>
L>t>t xJJ ii>-^J^ ^>
oLa-f^-J
^b
V
J ^1^ ^5^X5
&.J5
jj
See Lesa. 34,
4.
Ip
JNJ>
^5^
JJJ
372
Supplement.
^H
jS'waJ
Letters, Invitations.
*!jsAlI
^^L-JI iCcLJi
r
oUJ!
CT
^
XcUaJli
ii
J |jJb
373
Supplement.
Js >iLol
!
^
iJoLc
vc
>J
Private letters.
L,
Lo
374
Supplement.
yCi
&UJ|
O
i
(TJ-^ xU^XJ! dU ,.000 Lo!
^'u^x
fJ*ST
w*
Business letters.
3!>J!
r
b|
r
Luis L^|
jj>
875
Supplement.
xLjij *x* u, vj|^>
SJ^UU!
vJuoJ
J^o
US'
Ifil3
f&4
UJ Ojj
fc
o>Lo
ULi Ut
iJu*
jo
XOJ
j,t
yac. ,
cr
I^L-jS
to!
!
ci
U
yu.Jt
j
sicljli
-j
ii
378
Supplement. 'AsLaaA
Q U*i[s
^Otf
y+1 x
vil
'^J
j&S*
.
.
.
&Lw
.
ail
.
JdJl
JJLJt
^l,! l
KUi
,**
ft]
_^P
(
^
IAT
*J'
it KJuuxit
fe j^> vj wel^l ^ XJUxUt o
379
Supplement.
,4)JU
-
Jl
9
_->
iLo^UJl
iU
^1
380
Supplement.
*-J!
(iJJ iuU
8
1JJ>
J^
Jail
-
Ui/
31
^!
381
Vocabulary words (arranged according
of
to
Exercises and Selections
in
the
in
roots)
Part
II.
NB. The vowels in brackets after a verb indicate of the verbal noon. n. pr, 2nd radical in the Imperf. vn. proper name.
=
^
particle of interrogation.
1
IV. to
0-o
-E
.
=
and
s.s*t
tJot (with negative) never. o-
8jj
hire
plur. j>[ needle.
;L>] reward,
price,
s
^x>!
hireling.
o ,s
10
>
,
o
o-o
X. to hire
let
0^
Ibrahim, f*S>jj| '
Abraham.
OE
Jo-1 period, death
Jo-^
9
Jo j camel
for (coll.).
60
e.
daughter,
sake
for the sake of.
girl
^X>|
fern.
os v-)!
2 (jj|) father
f
fool of
-(jr^i
ULJ sunday.
fatherly.
n. pr. of the court-
Hamn
(with (u) to take, get HI. imperf.) to begin to VIII. to take for to blame
Arrashld.
-E
6
to refuse. Jji (a)
to
come
o
bring
!
,Jc>U
to
move
^i
0-^
plur.
o plur.jli'l
6--antiquities
notable matter.
V. to be late
f>\
fern.
V. to be 0,
influenced
ruins,
conception.
following. '=>]
II.
E
o
*X>I taking
O
with CJ to
--
yi
vn.
oneself
-s (i)
one
-s
)&
j
Jt
that
of),
o
J*>1
S-o KAJ
JJ son
(the
o
iJji'U
jS>\
and j*s>\
c
other
z last,
end
to the last
man.
382
Vocabulary.
S-o o
wO
and
hare.
I
s ->
->t
brother
6 .02
G
plur. s>=>l
lion.
plar.
plar.
sister.
O-E
_
o! II. to
o
captivity
war.
trained,
S -
cultured
be
to
(a)
of
^0!
all,
of ^-y! prisoner
entirely
-s.
^^
training
jo*!
V-JOi
discipline
V.
afflicted
good
^
9
vex
to
training.
oneself
V O? H. and IV. to transmit, Alexandria.
carry out, accomplish. since j when,
(conj.)
&J
3]
'at that time.
o
,
(^|
behold!
when,
if-
the
o ,
permit (with UJ)
-
X. to ask
announce G
permission
- O0l
&
stall.
to
6
,*
Jwot X. to root out
&
J-
o
oo| permission
origin
ear.
IV.
(a
o
IV. -
to
(see
Ismailia
quarter of Cairo).
then. .ol to
os
9Uwt name,
plar.
_ Xo5
altogether.
horizon. injure
sir
(a58vn|0
damage.
my
master. October.
^-
,1
n. to date.
V OC
.. JJ'f ,
II. to
assure
o^l^t earth, land.
assured. -,E
,
.Vj
V. to be
^jfr
plur. (a) to
be sleepless
vn.
J* J (n) to eat
GOB vn. J*l
food.
G,o u^jA^I oc arnants, albanians.
clerus -
Of the definite article.
^t, J^U
Vocabulary.
fern.
plur.
)*! yesterday.
who, which.
to
to
II.
t
AJ| (a) to
become accustomed
-
to edit
II.
V. to con-
hope G ,E
aider
JwJ
III. to
r,
^^.
^U T
plur.
hope.
c
be
Jj]
with G >i.
familiar
G.~
rf
plur. Obit and O^Jt thousand
be safe
to
(a)
believe (in v-J)
IV. to
VIII. to rely
book.
on
^U
!
a
German
J.U German I
,-2
-
true,
God, Allah. c
O
-
^X| to
unto jl
an
S
as
U>!
Q*^
a reliable
5 E
until.
i|
and
that.
Q!
alternative). -
mother
pr.)
person.
jt
(in
(n.
,
>
or
Emin
believer
SI
ij a god
yyt
deposit
reliability,
2 -oS
Loll! Germany.
l{ at
iolot
safety
O
O r oZ
l!
Q^t
pain.
I*-!
,|if-^]ifnot,else-^|-i
-s
|U! before
(prep.).
only
o
!
^] except
that.
LJJ
only.
for.
truly, verily
.]
emperor. to j*l (u)
command,
(with accus.
of the person and
i_J
OoE thing)
jA
\
,
plur.
9
command; G
-
of the
plur.
y
,% !^
Emir,
>o! fern, cio! thon
jA^J Prince of the
yon .
G
>i*
y>Lc
an
imperial ^_5jjyt official.
(dual)
^t
you
rJ! in. to be friendly G E amiability
G
(j***-^
. o
G
, o
woman.
^f amiable
"
...L*oj plur. fjJj
G^
(plur.).
Got
E
S
faithful
L4Jui
o>oc
.^x! matter
Prince
-oS
oE
5
>
E y>l
-to*i< JAnatolia,Asia Minor,
"
man
884
Vocabulary.
j*bo] English English
(coll.)
- (j;j^J
c>!
(adj.).
V. to be slow
5'
^5* that iB >
(Jot
to strengthen.
II.
i)
Suj plur.
*
""
JU4 and V.
^I3
{
vessel.
where
equip oneself
to
-
fem '^ -
5
*
plur.
(*tj>
bud.
to
make; (with
ing imperf.) to begin -K s
followto.
Geography.
wound. (i)
plur.
to dry.
journal.
hard, rough.
e
-> V.
to drink in draughts.
> OjS* G.o
excavating.
v5ij~7*-
(i)
to
be exalted
journal, announcement.
IV. to
G
show honour- J^i>
,
exalted.
390
Vocabulary.
G
X.
have
to
a
thing
(i)
to lash
II.
to bind
Go (a
book}
GS
G-o..,
Q> and &is>- demon
***=
g
brought.
v>d>
->o ,
j_^$*s>- crowd, public.
G
JJb-
plur.
,
,
mad.
garden
O>Ls-
G
company - ^L>
plur.
mosque
>
to be ready
9s
union, as-
II. o
r
to equip,
G
.
.o
,
prepare
sembly.
high school.
camel a) to
beauty
XJu.-> sentence,
n. pr.
sum
wholesale.
total
be ignorant
very ignorant. :
firmament. IV.
to
answer,
391
Vocabulary.
corrrespond 6, oS answer.
plur.
(i)
IV. to love
O
o
J^>-
friend, beloved
JL.js-1
the poets)
(in
^
vy*J>
OS
-
-
E
>^>t more
(elative
ioj^ beloved (fern.).
loved
excellent.
ink.
t
u) to act wrongfully
towards
O
love
i.
>~ o c
- ,
>>- excellence
o!_^> steed
vn.
- *
*"*S
x^
and
HI. to be
(j*)
neighbour to
Abyssinian.
j^-t" tyranny
pi ur Jlls- pregnant. .
'
s -plur. Q'^^T*-
jls-
jj> until, so that.
neigh-
G ,
bour
-
to be allowed
jL>
make
to
2
(^>s*
2
u)
hunger
n. pr.
c
Abd
al-Malik. (u) to conceal.
(v5^> u) to ramble about.
?-
al-Hajjaj,
governor for the Caliph
jjL=
hungry.
Plur.
-
_L>- pilgrim
be hungry
to
o^
p jJ
iiL>-
the pilgrimage
-
vn.
-
cb*.
(u) to incite.
^s> ( u)
(j>>- u) VI. to exceed.
-
o>
>'
j!>:? neighbourhood.
j^
/\& jewel. come
to
i)
stone
s^^
lap
j^"
room. vn.
G
O
, *
Jc^
plur.
,
Q^^"
it.
vXs>
(n)
partridge. 2 -
to limit
P^r. LJ>^.C> pocket.
*Xs- plur.
up
boundary o
Gizeh (near *"
>
Cairo).
J>jJsJ- iron.
to
J
II.
plur.
iji^>
army.
to
''
century.
to narrate
relate *
to
V.
VI. to converse - S i plur.
892
Vocabulary.
narrative, -*
,
conversation G,
,
burning.
^*^>plur.
v_Jjy>
letter
alphabet), particle.
(of
beautiful, also n. pr.
the beauty.
Vocabulary. 00
,
!..
L*os>- i\i to anguish make oneself comfortable.
Ka-Ji=>
j*a5
-
truth
real.
O O
get (money)
>
wisdom
IV. to
happen
(u) to
*yi>- plur.
>
(,IX4X>- Persian) ruler,
&j*x>- acquire-
O
ment
(ie)
J^oL5>
result -iteS" II.
products.
(u)
to
come
appear,
make ready
to
governor,
judge
government, court wise
physician,
III.
to
~x>
-
court.
IV. to bring
converse with
to
(i)
relate
IH.
to
presence
presence (also used as a
title)
AjLs>
imitate
narrative,
story.
present, ready,
J>
loosen, settle, inhabit
(u) to
railway station.
VH. to
(i)
smash.
z=" happiness. W
to be loosed
entrance (of a period of time) ^bLs> a thing allowed 2 ,-
rf
(u) to
jj| a
0^2^
surround.
plur.
name
quarter (of a town)
of the Caliph
Omar.
place
-
belonging to a place.
(a)
to keep,
vn.
guard
swear
to
(i)
make
X. to
to swear.
Mohafaza shaving,
(province of Egypt).
dark black.
solemnity, festival.
O
V, to be verified
-
P lar
X.
-
,
oc I
dream.
g. to deserve, plur.
be due
,*^-
right,
($> troth
sweet gift
J_jJb> present,
sweetmeats.
394
Vocabulary.
death j
-
u>
fever
^J?
(5>) III. to tempt to be cunning X.
VHI.
si
o>
typhoid fev^r.
be
to s^"
to
(a)
O =
> -o O^S~t n. pr.
-
power, year
j
^^5> o
n. pr.
0^>
round about
red
\
O
,
-
carry,
to
^Ls>
vn.
JJ_*^ exchange
pregnant
bearer,
artful
porter. it is
Unavoidable.
to protect.
(i)
fr
o -
5
cunning
^J?
present
-
]
(adv.)
UJls- as soon
.>
as
-
Q>)
induce
-
i
immediately to
(i)
state
condition,
Ol^5>!
become red
plur.
-oS
O
AJLs> condition
J*T
(prep.)
9
vX*^
n. pr.
to
i3-=-
impossible
JC"
vn.
praise
rys-
rf
OyjL> wine
(i) I.
and
VHL to
contain.
shop. xx5>-
D
X^l>- wheat.
where, since.
j> (-c>) H.
V.
to confuse
J+ O
1
Us-
bend.
(u) to
J^
(
VIU.
T ^>)
to
need
'
O -t
,
G
Ls-
plnr.
,
,
s-
be- confused
time.
and
^J!_j^>- need, matter.
U. to
axis.
IV. to
SjL>
let
make
possession.
be ashamed
greet
live,
X.
to live O - -
O
I
to -
o
o o-
court-yard.
)
IV. to surround
wall.
life
-
^ys- quarter (of
city), 3
settlement,
tribe
serpent
\*s-
-
-
iyp*
animal.
395
Vocabulary. S-
-
Us*
Vm.
conceal
(a) to
to
*Jtj3- cupboard
'hide oneself. gazine, shop.
e~>
rascal. loss.
9 ,*3-
m.
O,
VHL
plur.
>^*isi> WOOd. 2
special
baker.
(i.
-
close
to seal,
-
'
(ji> (n) to concern
specially.
to strike, trample on.
(i)
^>
test
2
OS, jL=>
j^r> bread
(i)
IV. to
to
,
jUi>i news.
Jo,
seal
, o
news
to get
inform
,
^
VIH.
special.
to shorten
-
compendium.
^-o.
seal-ring.
g plur. ...Ux3J> eunuch.
X. to 0,0
u) to serve
xAXi-
take into service.
i-
n.
to dye.
o
service 'L=>
servant
[oLs>
o^^
become
to
maidservant.
green
green
S
vegetables.
(Persian) Khedive, ^jJo> '
prince
B
writing.
ruin
(,
out bring " G
-
te go ou' vn.
IV. to
-3j3HI.
^
>
tribute -
-,
,L>
to
risk
outside.
danger
(OJ .
-
-'
jH3-
plur.
dumb. heart, condition.
VIII.
to
pierce,
oothrough
vn.
>.
cut VIII. oneself.
to
snatch
for
896
Vocabulary. O fern.
light (in weight),
,
five
fifty
be hidden (from
to
(a)
e,
(j**i*>
fifth
Thursday.
IV. to hide.
c)
he who holds back use a toothpick
V. to
J^> and ,>*>
friend, also
Satan. III.
VHL
to
to quarrel
choke
with
(intrans.).
n. pr. sir
(Persian)
>
canal.
(used
of
Christians).
fear
(a) to
H. and IV.
to
II.
free to
O^j> and
frighten
V. to free oneself. XilJtf fear.
sincere
worship Li-
honest.
(
t
have intercourse VIII. to be mingled.
III. to
with
to
III.
disagree with, V. to remain
contradict
behind
VIII. to go
iiU>
down
up and
Caliph -
successor
--
-
CfcxJ*
,L> Jo
v_il>
betray, deceive.
disappointment.
(jx3-)
VIIL
to choose
-
good, better.
r^>
succession
successor,
other than
-,>> u) to
OS, pU>
thread
r.
J^>
plur.
to
i3_^> horse
.3- (/**>) II. to
to break (of night) plur.
to
*i
(u)
to
be empty
be alone. wine.
pitch a tent,
different
(u) to create.
^>
(coll.).
KaJLi^ breach
odx^
of law
tailor.
,U>
tent.
VIII.
AJ!O plur. v-Jt^ beast of burden. [.
to arrange
jLOJ
flight.
397
Vocabulary.
SjcO
invitation
plo induce-
j.O
(
blood
Vocabulary.
uJ
plur.
Dinar
jAJta
(a gold
o (jjO
Divan.
coin).
3
to
(u)
uij
approach
world
S
medicine.
JO cock.
lowest.
^ol
JO
time, fate.
in.
o, plur. iL
O
02
,
O
Diwan,
plur.
O
and
crush
to
religion
the
of
day
dark-coloured.
judgment.
y>
plur.
O
(.i-jO)
c
misfortune.
wolf.
sickness
o
, ,
oO Jb io
revolve
house
land
00-JO
circle
--
,!o
plur.
languid.
uO
jfj^o
to keep, save.
(i)
to flow, shed (tears).
period. (u) to
j^O director,
(a)
plur. -Jl^O
,
jjJwo
Ji-3
monastery
sjfo
5jjO turn
editor
mention, remind Oo
3^
V. to remember
xjjjjwo Mudiriya
' i/
^y'o remembrance XjJLxit
remembrance
JsJjJ!
9 '
jtX> O,
kingdom
and
(Egyptian
province).
, ,
s?
slay
slaughter.
(^jO) (u) to
plur. jjO
o
to
(a)
David.
O.
-
S^stAi'
certificate, ticket.
the Turkish Empire. io
to (jjO u)
so long as
last
S
plo
u
,
^o
'u*jto
this
also
always. ti)Ji3
,^O on
aroused
(j/3)
n. pr.
fem.
tiUJ'
plur.
i^^J^I
side of, before, that, those.
without (also beware!
Oo,
O sin, fault
, ,
wuJ
tail.
399
Vocabulary.
Oi-> 3 (a) to go
vn.
n. pr. of
v_.
month
a
^y
9
GS-J G
w6
square
gold.
J-ys a square
j-?^
mile.
otJ
fern.
30
master, possessor o ,
olo
gen.)
(with
j
j
ol-; (i) 'III. to look through IV.
C*f3^ u) to taste
^53
make
to
G
IV. to give
back
-
) >
^_^;
return.
taste
to
VIII. to tremble.
taste.
plur. its* (j*\j head,beginning,promontory
ft
^
A
spacious
f
welcome! G
aspect.
2
**>
..
^Jj lord
plur.
G u
G
,e>S
journey)
i)
G,o fern.
-
-oEo-o
glx^,^! G
ji
j
j-Jji
.
a fourth
permission, G-oB
5CJ, plur. ffU.I
JJSl
i.
the all-compassionate
Wednesday 00}
fourth
>
*
i.e.
God.
four
o-
|_jj
.
and
T; compassion -^>>H
to bind.
O...OE
ijOj!
'^j
journey. ,o.
(u,
stage (of a
U^_, perhaps.
*NJ, plur. Jjjf gain.
Ja?P
^
i5'u>j
tender.
permit
400
Vocabulary.
to
(u)
4j
give
answer,
back,
I.,
o^j
and IV.
to thunder.
refuse.
E>,
to
(a)
make bad
S0j IV. to
attention
pay
+O, rains.
shepherd correspond with o_ send Ju*^ plur.
III.
J^j
III.
pasture
$o
9^0,
bad.
a
(of
to
clj
A.^
subjects
kingdom)
Cr?r*
.,
IV. to
"5
>
Jo^ O
.>
wish
to
(a)
"*,
} *
lur i3>*^ P
message
pasturage. (for
-
,t)
G^O)
-
wish,
'i^f-j
J
Jw-^, apostle.
c'
loaf.
, ,
halter.
^j-wj
in spite of. l*^j 1 -
anchor.
(u) to
(a)
j
to
lift
up, take
away
ijij (u) to sprinkle. r.
VIII. to raise oneself
o }
Os^
K*^,
majority (of a child)
"3
J
Jy^
upright
5 c
(X^^Si
a raising
=
title
^31 ; exalter,
Harun ar-Rashid one who leads
aright.
III. to
fSpj
_*i>J; Turkish leader.
accompany
xis^
o
rope.
9'ui,
company
* ^j
$
(
companion. lead
i
bullet.
N^J
n.
to set
with precious
stones.
oj
IV. to suck (of a
child).
V^ 'neck.
III.
Jo, "5
-^
(a) to
be content
IV.
make contented, satisfy VI. to come to terms with. to
^i>,
II.
refresh.
to
(i)
jj
to
,
lie
x*J^
down
,
sleep.
II. to
patch
(short letter). j*5
soft.
observe
(u) to sleep,
,
ol^,
jJ,
be tender,
(u) to write.
&jiij a
note
401
Vocabulary. * >
vn.
to ride
(a)
9
a
ft
^_^j
,
understood
is
it
oLx
among
wish, will.
f*i]j plur. ^Q^, passenger
9
'-o-
>
o
;
to
II-
(3j)
;
ship.
terrify
..
terror.
,
centre.
(u) to run.
VI. to be
Rome,
heaped up.
r.,
and VIII.
I.
(a)
to
'
whole, totality.
be
9-
sufficiently watered
-
JSilg)
narrative, piece (in theatre).
plur. -Lo^ lance.
q-
-
j,
sand.
Mejidi = 22 piasters
30 paras. -o_j
pomegranate
cultivated
Plur.
throw
to
(i)
AJ
(coll.).
land.
projectile.
~>
9
monk.
plur. {y-*^;
i
o pledge ^5
1
Joj^S!
jt&j pledged.
u) to
be
u)
to
the Ezbekiyg
.a
square
in Cairo).
plur
customer.
.
9 a-
C'J fe3-' astray to
II.
rest
?
and IV. to permit VIII. and X. to
ic
rest
awa7 or
rest,
ct,; sower,
plantation -s.j\ t *'* / o,, * planter
comfort t
,
field,
name
blue
of a
9 jj plur. .
^
wind
L>
^^|i vexatious.
about to (do something)
*^>j \,
plur,
*
o
>\j (Oj^,)
' .
itJ:
odour
^j^j
spiritual.
IV. to wish
Arabic Gi
earthquake.
9
- ,
-
MJ
plur.
-
9
0$
Q^f
time
-
.
o^j
time. 26
402
Vocabulary.
Go, i
P lur vW-~' cause.
modesty, asceticism. G oE
5>-,
o,
-
,,
.,
plur. obx>
j >
flower
jl-^ji J
Jt^ll
L$j Saturday.
-9
Azhar
the
5tx>Li!
'~
J
j*+^*-* September. in Cairo.
mosque
n. to marry
Oh
(O.:) V. to
G
^ Go^ seven
take as provision
(i.e.
--
God).
**^
wild beast
vdfe.
G
fe
-
,
^
1
plur.
provisions.
,U
u) to visit
(, 5 :
(i,
visit
j (3jy
-
cease
u) to
a,
make
u) to
seventh
P lur
IV.
UuL*
(for
(jf**-
earlier.
-
G, ~, aJyyw) plur.
to cease.
week.
jAjLwj
precede
precedence
lie.
,*
to
*JU*X~ praised be He Go -
,
Oh ,5;
&:
-
husband
;
G
=
oui
.
x*-w fem.
lady A
, i)
to increase
VIII.
sixty
'
,
to increase
G,SOb
' ,
and
-s,L>w ,
excess G ,,
increase
'O^-
-
G
n. pr.
:
Jo tj
--
bidder
0>
t^x.
plur.
curtain. G, s
,
yoLi!* prayer carpet
auction. II. to Tj
(
!^
(^j)
jjj
i)
to
remove.
enter (in a register). 6 })
plur. II. to
adorn.
>--n n. pr. of a a) to
tj
question, request
beggar.
S
,
ask (after ^c), beg
-
prison.
hot.
woman. o
>^
,
dam, stoppage. 'J, s i x th.
Vocabula
453
_-~ (Persian) head, chief. (u)
to
\r
rejoice
-
joy
*.***
^
and
plur.
^
--
secret
foot (of a
J
!
r
couch
,
_
,
_
dining-table
^
-
plur.
glad.
ambassador.
^ plur.
..
j*.
to
go to pasture in p* the morning II. to cause to go etc. (a)
-
low, under (part.).
o^^o' to dress.
-
street.
ship.
- -
Jaa**
(u) to fall
to fall
.-
fw
hill).
IIL to trayel
-
IV. to
VI. to
fall
one
make after
another.
Your Excellency
(Turkish)
happy, also
n. pr.
IV
-
'
to intoxicate
'
O
j
n. pr. fern.
to dwe11 '
Js^ll
be
fore-arm.
oo
o
ji^v plur.
-
o
s
,Lx*vl
current price,
II.
to
o-
,
quieten
i^jC*- dwelling, rest rate.
o to
(a)
to
plur.
exert
L^a
oneself exertion.
dwell
,.jdx> dwelling
.lXw inhabitant,
404
Vocabulary. * *
>
plur. (j\.SlXv
quiet
O oo, at
knife.
Oo to
(u)
rob
plunder,
o ,,
i
and
j^w
AJ
gUw O
,
butter
QLo G O o,oS
VIII. to desire, wish.
L*i
oL^I and v*"^
5
A
(j>i) in. and X. IV.
advice
to
advice
ask
to
plur.
indicate,
\j&
advice.
^ VIII. to yearn O , oS
CJ^A) -
desert.
rock, peak.
concerning.
^t longing.
plur.
name of a month.
(u, i)
to
G
^
i (i)
i
to roast.
(z-.f*" a)
plur.
a
>
to wish
oS
*
l-yit
- >
to
>
man, j
^H_^
sheykh
< -
rat.
satan, devil.
Hermon.
~
JI
-
~"
friendship
sincerity, o
voLo
breast.
VI. to unite
sincerity
old
M
>
^ e Bincere
to confirm
little.
*&
go out from
^a
plur.
^if" V-
thing
master,
possessor, friend.
O
U> H. use
V. to
VII. to
remove
to spend,
(i)
dispose of
V*jLo
g
iUo deed
clear.
misfortune
accident.
'
409
Vocabulary. O
2
- o
Jv&
plur. o!_^iot voice.
opposite.
i -
IV. to listen to.
./to
soda.
to
(u)
*
compel V. to imagine
jf
plar.
t>\j&
damage
j5yto
injury 2
picture,
VIII. to
injure
copy
, >
necessary.
(Sj)}?
picture. *
La
,
(Turkish)
gLa
(i)
^to
a (gold) piastre.
to strike, coin o o
VIII. .
blow. ^-Jyto
to be troubled u) to protect.
_Lo (^yo C ,
J^ '
to cry out.
i)
^
,
jLo
(JS-MO
i)
I.,
O O
V. and VIH.
~
IV. to kindle. lyto r
-
Oo.x> hunt.
to hunt.
jW
(3/0)
weakness
to become,
- (j^ (with imperf.) i)
beast of prey.
'
Sidon.
>
to fart
(i)
happen
weak
to begin to.
_
^,
plar
double ,
Jua (i,
officer
u) to correct
-
(i)
wander from
to
err,
tQ
gather
path.
JajU,
-i
-
^
_
m^
assemble.
^
ce-
hyena.
^^^
interior
contents. j-Uo (^>to u) to to light.
unrest.
f
IV.
shine
,
IV. to lose.
afternoon plur.
-
environs.
^
ftdd
_
410
Vocabulary.
vLto
y) V. to feel oppressed
(/
ji^b
plur.
path,
fashion.
need.
IV. to feed
^*JP
GO.
0,0, ^Jax
^s*Jp cooking
5-*b
to
(a)
o
b
Jix
IV. to extinguish.
.
&b
to agree with
tVi in
P.*
** ;jx
nature
to cover oneself, 1
(a) to pierce thrust of a lance.
vn. *--b
office.
printing
m.
kitchen.
'
print
XJEAXXT
f*b
plur.
physician.
uniform.
VII.
v-^lb G -
be shut
accordance with.
(u) to
require, seek
o.o
-
vn.
G
wOUb and xJLb demand.
,
O-b v_b
bw
deaf.
(jijbj
side, place.
absolute.
to quieten oneself.
Ub]
GO
,
knock at
(u) to
cast
down
the eyes
O ), plur.
>
IV. to
(a)
to
desire
greedinese.
Go,
and
^b
b way
-
o
II.
to purify,
clean.
,
-*-b
411
Vocabulary. "
s
*'.-
uM^tjI? peacock.
plur.
to
IV. to obey
X.
be able to do (with
accus.)
s
f
JJ&
II.
shade
Lxf*
Jci
j
Jslax shady.
Ua IV. iLcLb obedience
shade to
to give G
become dark
to
G
Go 3
, ^
*^a oppression G - , *JLb oppressor darkness
(xk
ilcLb*
at
service
your
obedient.
j9&
go round.
u) to
yb IV. to be able to
)
S
G
..
and IV.
^*? (a) to
be long
II.
to lengthen
\^o
J*J>b long.
show
get the upper
hand Go,
y$s and Sj-^
5^
G , r^u? external.
Xcb
enclosed.
^c
^o
i)
to
be good, calm
G
1>
to
i)
cloak.
LkC in vain.
jlxb!
IV. -
to
Go,
*** (u) to worship G , slave plur.
^**
Jub and j*b
cause to fly G , os
kXow
n. pr. e.
*
juijb plur.
iiJ!
temple.
bird.
VIII.
gazelle.
jib
be anxious about
good
fly
G
5
pass, to
hail!
(jxb
plur.
(a)
SeUc woollen
w ,
vv^3
oneself
,j^b
midday
1
fold
j_j^*J
-
JjtL table.
Jo
IV.
X. to G , ,
j^a back
appearance Go> G-
VII. to contain (with Jsc)
thought.
seem, appear
to manifest,
o length
,^
Q_^k
plnr.
AJiLb power, u) to
esteem
(u) to think, believe,
O^3 do
oppressed
--.i
perienced
to
esteem, G.o8;-*^
tb^y witty person,
sjUc agreeable, comfortable.
expression.
be extears
412
Vocabulary.
n.
*Xe
u*
pr.
the Abbasids. 8 -oj Osman Turks.
cease to exist, be
to
(a)
IV. to deprive 6 - -
deprived of (with 2
r*^*
accas.)
want.
L
raging (of the
sea).
TivXc)
plur.
^vXc and
I.
^fc l^c
ed
at
(with
G
L^
orfv.
beside.
Go,
IV. to
Q,)
v^tXc sweet
,
v^ astonishment
please
G sweetness
jtAc
Go effaced
(i)
wonderful matter.
3
.
:
^
II. to
hurry o s-
plur.
j^
bedouins -oE (3^^ an arab,
(coll.),
joi*.
pr.
old
a bedouin. G
>.
do quickly
X.
to
bride,
J^ and iJL
haste
throne.
young woman,
^
to
(i)
offer,
give
over,
communicate, happen to V. to interfere in VIII. to
-
adv. quickly.
G 0-
,
iXc
excuse.
S
paid beforehand
w
jAc
S
JjLc
_j^ ^e) woman.
V. to be
>
,
J-t arabs
be unable to do (with
to
-
/>
OL
stick
(jH*e)
rebellion. t
be powerful
to
(i)
Sjc
(
^a
a
u) to bite
Maghreb, western land
ujyw 'O
o
O
_
plur.
Wjl**
':: , r
X.
jac
- *
^
moor.
ask pardon.
to
?:>".'.
*JLac.
carelessness.
O to
sift.
i L and
..
II. to twitter (i)
to
O
,,
o
.c piastre.
plur.
xJLc
conquer
victory e-
(a)
to
vJuc
usual.
make
a mistake,
aim.
be deceived.
o,j
AJ^
plur.
O,i
room.
.-**
aU
IV. to speak harshly.
---
IV. to drown.
IV. to bolt
(a door).
O,o c
Gaza.
jji
dear.
abundant.
plur.
r
,E
,
ilo! and
skiflf
coming, next (month
!JO
V*
shortly
~
'
o
-
(Jo:).
arrive
arrival
near O
to
value
j*Xs
.,
to
II.
part
-
421
Vocabulary.
-*s s
endure.
III. to
ioJs
to cut, cut
(a)
through
..
J^
to narrate to (with
j>aJ> (u)
15-b
iUoS narrative,
story
be cut
aim
to
Xjtioi piece
off
. ^
make
at,
.Xoi and
intend
VII. to
fj
-Jai
(i)
II.
waylay
,
?
scissors.
to
jLi
cut to pieces
to
herd
flock,
-i^b"
for,
the
3
purpose, aim.
muqattam
hill
(near
Cairo).
> ~
ai
IE.
to
Joti
neglect
(u) tj
S
J^.t_^s rule.
])!ur.
j&
shortness
down
sit
piur.
castle.
bottom
^-*i
ai X. i
to investigate.
(of the sea etc.).
O
T-o,
(of
the
sea).
VIII. to take flight.
IV. to oppress (with j^c).
measure. ,*c^J
O
(a)
to lick.
HI. to remark
if.
glance
-xtii^J
moment.
425
Vocabulary.
to follow, concern
(a)
cursed.
,
..
*Ji5-bS
S>-I>S V^* /
plur.
appur-
tenance.
.
Mb! k*5) language. S
G
.
plur.
6,0
,
,
meat
(yi*J
s
,
v_jJ fold
y>caJ VIII. to turn to.
LkJ! melody.
plur.
beard
"
and IH.
(a) I.
IV.
to
make oa
JuJJ (a)
-
(sensuously)
9Lu meeting.
f
and
pleasant.
be necessary
to
-
ikXl pleasure
necessary need.
^LJ
meet
-
pleasant
y
to
IV. to throw V. to receive VI. and VHI. to meet X. to fall on the back
,
;
Ju
included.
i
a piece of meat.
a a
,
LaJ
plur.
-
-
^
i:^ plur.*;
CT^
bnt
U
(
with
im P erf
when
Ian-
-
nce
'
Bense of
in
-
P*rfO not
plS tongue,
and
-
f
to
guage. S
IV. to haunt,
collect
"*
\
(j.aJ
1
,
v
infest (with VJ).
,
plur. t>>j*i5 robber.
''
to treat in a friendly
yo
way lJ
^t
to
VIII.
beseech
(with
friendliness
W to flash ~
friendly, pleasant.
TV
-
to cause
to shine, deal with.
(i)
flacae
to slap.
(a) I.
and
VI. play
III.
G ,, to
jest
with
G .of
U>LJ5
V_^JL)
plur.
vJkf! ' o-
-
V. to sigh.
_^> if (of
a pure supposition)
n. to wish good evening IV. to be or remain in
2L*^
the evening
i^JU
-.^ta
salted
x>^L
sailor
navigation.
evening,
monsieur.
5,0u
(i)
to
II.
possess
e JL*
(i)
to go,
walk
*&** S&^
walk about
xU
V. to
ii\X possession of O ^o Goj and (iUx plur. i)bLl posseso *iU* plur. sion, property
give
plur. (J*\^A cattle.
,0
2
O
L2/a*
Cairo
Egypt,
_y*ou
angel
Egyptian, Cairene.
^J#*A
(i)
2
to o
to go
away, be
lost
er
*iUu and
_ yjfc kingdom
>
course
(of
time)
mamluke, slave.
past, last. (u) I.
i
and IV.
plur.
jLbil
to rain.
rain
CT who? he who.
white
428
Vocabulary.
Ju (Oy)
from, than.
of,
o favour
>
Qj~-*
Ol^x!
wealth,
LJt_ys (or J-[^x) a
capital
death
kind of poetry.
o.
*
piur.
o
obligation, thanks. 9 to
(s^o) plur.
s,
sLy water.
..
snce.
table.
VIII. to
*.ix (a) to prevent
i)
to incline,
bend
6
refuse.
inclination
Memphis. v-iui*
Manuf
(a city in Egypt).
3s
u
accue.
(with
to
announce to and
of person
fate,
death. blood.
to
and IV.
II.
-
***
JL* V. to wish
.
plur.
mile.
\*J
of thing)
o
barking.
Lo news.
be slow, 3
plur.
journal
profession, trade.
-o
(a,
i,
article
tXj-i
(in
a
etc.).
to
u)
spring up (of
'
oU
die
IV. to
and
and
u) to
(o^x
f' "'
oy>
kill
o
e
,
oL^
death
G
o ,
^*
pliJ"-
dead.
'
VIII.
to
pay G- -iitf'Lo
attention,
wakefulness
G < &AXJ awake, clever.
b
r '^ 1
o
notice
-*-
,
water).
wave.
-^
joiner.
the Muski (a street in
J^j-U
^* IV. to complete. Cairo). fs
>
>
(colloquially (_/&*) plur.
razor
-/*jx Moses,
mode, fashion.
^ ^
plur. v3l^Ft offspring, son.
plur.
|>^
star
o astrologer
r
f^-li
clear.
Vocabulary.
tip
(u) to
sLp
escape
escape,
deliverance.
Q
j-o,
*
^
death
$_ iow*o relation.
r
5
a
-
rf^^
->
^j*L^' copper smith.
o >
-
iLUo
(coll.).
copy.
os-o
,
o plur.
)
/?
-'^
textile fabric, tissue.
O bees
02
-
*^U*o| and tfJL*o
phir.
copper-
So,
^&
-
a
died.
G
'
he
V 0-
*
r C
^ towards,
(plur. of
t0
women.
5y>|)
\ji district
~
forg et
IV
-
to
about.
cause to forget. VIII. to choose.
L&J
LJy*
found
IV. to
origin.
n. pr.
J
bewail.
(u) to
(u)
-
announce
to
IV.
to quote, recite.
o JjJsJw* pockethandkerchief.
wiJ VIII.
A3 r
(a)
to
repent
repentance
tJJ IK.
to
-
-
fjOo
call,
confidant.
summon.
llvely>
^ G
J
Jvj
o
^
u ) to take
,
O^* order
vow o
o ^
-
o
os
v3tXJ plur. i3!cXJ! vile,
G
to spread.
iUt Ju
f
simpleton
lot
happiness.
,
abject. (a) i
badge of an order.
-
,
advise
to
plur.
**
vn.
^.NJUOJ
o
-,, oS P lur
U*^'
-
G
an d
LTl^
G soul, self
judge
ii (u)
- VDI. to expect
to see
G-, jJcu
and
G-o-tu glance, look
VIH.
j-aj
u~*aJ precious, 'o
to use
ex
]sion
Jo veil.
Go-'
inspector
jlaix
3JU i
G
cleanness,
G
>,
oyij
plur.
cash,
ready
money.
ap-
pearance.
useful
S?
OJLJ _-bli
ii
*
-o Nile.
XXj witticism.
*
"* -S
I
LP behold!
Jtx\ OpCix unhappy.
I
IJjCP thus.
olPcome!
^
IV. to deny.
Go-
G j plur. (j*>*-J ichneumon.
n. pr.
OJ5;LP G
j,
V>*P
lw Austria
blowing
Sj^JTthe w^fj plundering. _-$j plur. _-gj|
and
flight of
from Mecca
O -o
G,os
Go-
(of wind).
jjrjlw Austrian.
A.D.).
river
ji-gJt
Mohammed
Medina (622
to
l? plur. L
r>!^
unrest,
disturbance. etir
(a)
to
up
to.
X.
rise
to ill. to assail, "assault.
liL^j IV. to weaken.
to threaten.
II. -.
VIU.
L^l G
murmur to
be finished.
(of water).
GO
j
^X^J sailor.
(i)
G ,,
to destroy
p^XP
climate. . o
(\)
plur.
j l_jj|
light
j
ii
vn.
.
pJ^>
(plur.) clothes.
to
IV. to
guide
plur.
bestow,
present guidance, Avay of salvation. _jj plur.
li
pi_jJf
(3_jJ a) to attain
III. to
to (with two accus.) to take for oneself
hand over V.
fern.
kind, sort.
plur.
*^0 this.
V.J.P (u) to flee.
G-
-
G
,
oj
j-P plur. jLPt pyramid. g
attainment. a) to
^jP part of the
sleep thinness.
night.
432
Vocabulary.
(i)
send
to
rain.
engineer.
&
particle of interrogation.
^
X. to
appear
first
(new
G
-
.
oU>
ILL
9
IV. to destroy utterly
see!
..
*&$> destruction.
a(Jl3>
and
come
t^>- ^Jb"
be or become
u) to
IV. to offend, affront.
easy
s>-
-
hither!
passion weather.
UJ> they two. O
moderate
to
(price).
moon), begin.
4U2
ne
i
p& (*?
they (masc.).
IL
intend
to be important,
(i)
(with
to prepare.
be anxious about
plur.
to
i)
- x>
care 4
_
-
care
'
f L&> important anxious.
to fear.
take to stir up.
to plur.
love
'o ,o. r_^^
, 5>
be Passionately
-
up!
-
.
Lo
Lj>
up,
let
us go!
s _i5> (a) to
be pleasant (of food and, by (with genit. in oath) EL.
etc.)
congratulate
.
U-U^ good wish here
!
and misfortune encet
n. pr. of a
woman.
sXjj peg.
,
evil
conse-
433
Vocabulary.
trust
(3
J%
wild beast.
o
be necessary,
incumbent on (with ,J^) X. to deserve IV. to cause
,
friend8bip
to lay down> leave (only in imperf. and imper.) n. to bid farewell to (with IV. to store accus.) O --
_
affirmation
^L^.j
-
_
certificate.
lo^ departure.
o
Wb^t) incumbent on in
v^si-^j
(Jc)
(with accor-
*
dance with.
.)
Snd
to
G existence e > o^
to
ob?j
existent,
j*>5
-
-
finding
to bring 9
on hand.
plur.
^5!
revenues
paper.
painplur.
i. II.
II.
to
turn to
make
for
VIH.
V. to
^3
plur.
>>5 side,
-^>-_5
vezir, minister.
to share, allot.
to turn
.?*..
)
x>3
*>
,3
cheek.
^
olotjjj
small. ;3
>5
IV.
water) to arrive o - ,
face, fashion
district
balance
-x-ot
budget
-
respected. dirty.
alone (with suffixes) o
e
^Xs>U one ,
aingle. Arabic Grammar.
emiddle
-
Aixwl^ means
alone, ^X^>-5 " -
>
-
,e,S
fern.
o
o
.
middle.
434
Vocabulary. bring into the world, edit
5-~U
.wuv
roomy
wide,
place.
width, comfort.
means
J-l. V. to get the
-
^)
(with
to
w^-*-;
XL-,
for
to tread on.
>}
means.
^fib*
whisper, suggest
indigenous
'
fl
,
c,
native land.
suggester (satan;.
(j\f~
Jt
(Oou)
to
I.
promise (with
describe
to
(N^JUSJ)
accus. of person,
CJ of
thing)
attribute.
IV. to threaten, promise
SUU.A appointed time.
to arrive I
have received
II. to bring enter into relation IV. to make to arrive, VIII. V. to reach
III. to
with lead
to unite, reach (with
o
,
1()
60,
0,c,
jt
ruggedness.
III. to
be exhorted,
Jacj
to
,
0^0^
reception, re-
arrival,
o
* ,
abundant.
i!_
J*s
ceipt
receipt
union.
Jjj
make
a
IV.
to
will,
recom-
children
etc.)
to
to
wash oneself
happen
agree,
to,
VIII.
(jf-^j^
5
fulfil
(with
vj)
-
V. (pass.) to die '&> fulfilment (of a promise), payment
c-
IV. to explain obvious, clear.
n. to
(in
religious ablutions). ^to
III.
God)
success? (from God).
will.
-
V.
to help (of
agree to (with Jj&)
charge
charge (of parents to
A-y?" ~~ - E vj-o.1
to
answer
Desee(
best
3U,
be
attached
Vocabulary.
better
o
between bind
Leo
call
^o
calm
OvJ>
O ,01
JyJ canal
bitter
ii*^j ft ^
j*
o
cannon
o~\x
captain
...'ujuJi
black Oj-w! bold
^y-
book
uUi'
6
,e,,
,
^
plur.
xJ
book-shop
o
carry (>4J-
6
borrow 6
plur.
o Ulc
cease
G plur.
Q*-**
a certain
chain XJuJL..
>
jj^>
chamber
bring J^o, -
5
chance *iA*a character
bringing
G
L
^SL G
- ,
broom *
*^y=-
- o
bring back *=_;
cheerful
s
.
-^ .
brother
chief
buy L
circumstance
Caito
.
u^U
o!j (u, a)
certain
3
Gc,
bread
(i)
,
G ,o
t
boy fbU. plar.
-
~~~
cause ..
s
captive j^*t
y-w
city
xU
G^ , calamity iU**a* plur
clear
9, , caliph aJl;>
clever
JLs*- plur.
439
Vocabulary.
S
-o,
coreair (adj.)
destruction
^
country
determine
60-
die
i)
j
o'u> (u)
O
,
different
crowd jl>OjJ o-
custom
-
olc
diligence plur.
disappointed cut
ji
O, . Danger -La> plur.
dawn
wJL>
(a) r,
- -
disturb Jjui - disturbing
j do J*3 4
dog door
v
(a)
O
01
~^j^
Each
except
j! OS
earth
existing things
make easy
to
easy
^
-
f
-
o
^
Egypt
J^
--* expend
i3t\j
Egyptian ^5-
experience >
s
-o
2,
60,
Jou
encroachment
x>
Face
-
enemy ^.Xc
W>
plur.
fair W
energy
e faith
,
Urf
o tJui to
entangle
be
faithful
entangled farewell
escape
expenses
Ezbekiya '^Joj
encircle
enmity
-
g
f
vn.
^"^ 6
'
no escape -
especially
there is
jt^s a
j
.
^o ^
to say
father
s
UA**
^1
Fatima
x,
farewell to
Vocabulary.
441
442
Vocabulary.
o i health *LS -
2
*
heart
v^
inner
(a)
P lur
'
s
-
U?
6 honourable +*=
..OC
Jwflt
intercessor
J.J
honour *.^!
-
j*a-i plur.
;
-
'
'."
,
Jacob v-^S*^
3wt
plor.
horse J^=> e- -
hour
intelligent
intend
,*
hope
V^*
-
^
hither
jp
-
hear
W*h
fj
ink
Joseph ^A*^J
(coll.)
(j*J
y
journey * * >
iu
O o,
60,
house ^ji*
say JS
(u)
Go
scholar >XkJL) plur.
sigh
,..! ?
e ,,o school
-
AJL
since
io^^wo
plur. sit
O
60
sighing *>
science Jlc plur. -j
down y*Jb
skin
slay
gJLl
(a)
JJ3 6
G
e,-
A^
slave
plur.
Jy
smite soldier
secretly !j~
^**st
plur.
Go 6^ security
,
son
plur.
*x^L* Boon
see
^5^
seek
seem
(a)
^JL>
sorrow G
Go send back
send J-w;i G,o
sentence
o-
BOUl \j*J
(a)
_-
Q ~>
(u)
.
sound
,
*i*>
southwards J^A *?
separate Joe!
~ ~
speak JXi'
.
t
447
Vocabulary.
!L\? fern.
this
speech
2thought
spirit
*.
"
i^fc plur.
(
.,_^J
,,
standard
'/JLt
plur. *
threaten
^
throw
steed
Lac
stick
thrust
^b
e
JuU
thwart
still
(i)
G o, stone
plur.
j^~
time v^Oj
;u
G
^o,c
strange vo^c.
to-day (yjjfl
strike
together l*^*r*-
strong
tomb
Go-'
^X
Xc
success
torn
G
,
,
^!>X
g
travel
.'
tree
6
s
Tailor
^si"
iu^ -^ Jj' plur.j I^/T
trouble 2
take
traveller
^sL* ^*
Syrian
Syria ptiJl
true
-
Js
teacher tell
36
(u)
with
vi
truly
Q]
trust
(J^
G' s
ten see Less. 32.
trusty ;jyt
than cr sc that (conj.)
think
,-J
^
turn away two see Less. 32.
Oy>
Unite
^>
448
Vocabulary.
Index
I.
449
L Arabic Index (arranged alphabetically without regard to roots). The numbers
refer to the pages.
? 27. 55. 305.
44
-Uitlj
47. 49. 242. 245.
f.
...**
II. 38. 47. 242. 257. 277.
,-|
54. 305.
, o
^| M
8j LsjH
185.
J!
J5T
111
241.
38. 44. 49. 242. 245.
1
OeU
198
l
j
llf
249.
.
-Uo
t
122.
.o-
,
J
o
^|
J^UJI
88. 233. 238.
315. 323.
~]
90.
291. 315. 322. 328.
ix^|
Xv
315.
't
*L>
99.
95.
119f.
Arabic Grammar.
(
j] 244 jo *-
57flF.
249. j
ff.
257. 270. 271.
246
ff.
450
jfj
227.
jllj '
\
233.
usCx* +~[ 249. *",*, o'o
^23.
KW! 202
ff.
SE
^
78.
9.
53.
324.
3j 315. .*.*
197.
iCCJJ 310. 41.
44
ff.
281.
_
202ff.
^JJ! 274
oLc]
ff.
JL!? 2f. 99.
Jkil 95. 112
i?
253.
7.
~*
J54 ' -0^1
^'9 5 .io2
,JO^>
J
Jel 57 os
246. 247. 257. 274.
ff.
*>
j
oi
kj^AJt Job!
I
96. 116ff.
99.
JJL] lULdij
193.
96.
o oS
o
Oc
4^*^^
y'l
-
-*0
205
j1
yl!
r
89
^
J
**^i
j,]
62. 71
e ,o
j
j
58. 257.
>
^j^' J^i
O.
^
j
^UiJ-illeaff.
ff.
-
M^
253.
96. 118.
^'u6|
i
7.
ff.
89.
^
63. 293.
s
-
ff.
Index
V *M-
305.
S* r
t
"
r
329.
o,..
,
46. 271.
316
U] ,
451
I.
291.
-
316. 197.
.'
U
299.
Oc S
y!
62. 84
^S
ff,
197.
? 78. 91. 316.
^
815. 323.
^f
90. 280. 816.
yl
90. 279. 280.
UJj
or 306 f.
J3J - *>-
807.
JJJ!
j
95. Ill
f.
-
-
2g4
*,
J^J!
>-
-
Jju
288.
Index
452 -
I.
-o--
o-
299
^-.J
U*
Jl>'
f.
317.
193.
Sul-j 181. 171.
317. 99-
o
291.
800.
LJ
to s.
L
237. 280.
3.
9'J
G sjlj
o, 7
cr*^
310.
O-Go-
'H
ij-
-
Go-
283.
''.
307.
/*3
f
283.
8 *"188.
-
S
.--
-
290.
2-
300.
y^
40
281
ff.
ff.
'
300Sfj^. 8.
fciji.
321. 6.
8.
-
tr: ^> 5.
108
f.
F^
29. 256.
6o
^
30. 256.
?
?.:
corf.
Jwysiaj 58
.,
^J^
Jt*>
30.
33
247. 64. 90. '
Jauu
95. 107
J*i>
99.
6s
G
o
^
ff.
259
ff.
Index
*JT+S 0*->-
64. 91.
B.
O
***> 6
458
I.
*
xLaX*
282.
- -
5.
4 J
3.
v-^^ ^*5T**
A*J5^/0
5.
321. 8. '
280. 293.
s
6
o>
,
,
5.
^
45. 49.
.V-
800.
v5y>- 300.
290
1.
ff.
315
viJ^
309. 824.
Uixs-
809. 824. 310.
305.
^3.
65. 90. 279. 280.
s> 281
322
327
f.
ff.
Jufti- 340.
ff.
jJi.
^
313.
800
,
%=
15
300. 329.
^ i^^O
f.
,
,
5.
!o 53. '
K 5
5.
-
no M
* -
~
o!3
28
^)l3
53.
317.
454
Index
310.
j^>**xrf 309.
U
208 817 824 '
817.
^ m ^
'
280. 308.
r
1
^ ^
196
-
279. {jJou 62. 78. 314. 316.
g,3
(
^{)
78. 314. 816.
-
'
?tJOLy> 64. 90. 279.
*i* i5X~
283.
So. rr^SlS.
,*u* 274. X* 279.
^
J 82. 308. 317.
^J
78. 808. 328.
6.
282 ' !
JiI
29. 256.
'
'
458
Index
I.
f 339. 94.
jJLcUx 99. 0,c.>
278. 290.
Os
,
SJ^x 13
f.
OJk* 29. 256.
O-o JbuU
241,
Index
49
I.
J^
-
27. 55. 305. 809.
&
324.
329
'
832.
j**>
244
i
40
i
f*" ooz
257. 271.
ff.
ff.
279
ff.
U$>
(,
Up
329.
ff.
336.
^slj
283. 288.
y-I^l
^
815
-
^y
gH
280. 308.
*** ltf^3
813
194-
ob
JUi
ff.
J)JUP) 309.
78. 281. 291.
3
(^ 5
10
'
308>
f*
9.
310.
81. 306.
G-,T
302.
4j*
^ft*J 216.
G
,
336 U> 328.
"r
'
11
oo,
329.
333.
sjks
y, 1
00
317.
O o,
i
53.
VHS
336.
li
6
t,,
(g^5.
6 o, ^-5' 328
-
5 -50. 85. 279. 281.
327
f.
Index
460
II.
English Index,
Abbreviations 16. Abstracts 249. Accent 15. Accusative 279 ff. Address, Particles of, 50, 85 f. Adjectives 57 ff. 246 ff. 254, 258. Adverbs 305 ff.
Age
II.
Indeclinables 214, 226, 274, 309. Indicative 71 ff. Instrument 241. Intensives 247. Interjections 327 ff. Interrogatives 27, 54. Intransitive verbs 279.
220.
Alphabet
If.
Article 23
f.
Jussive 77, 80
Metres 335
Months 21-5 ff. Moods 76 ff.
Cardinal numbers 210 ff. Catalexis 334 ff. Class names 249. Cognate accusative 237 f.
Negatives 308. Nominal sentences 64
Collectives 27.
Concrete nouns 249. Conditional sentences 321 Conjnnctions 313 ff.
ff.
Dates 220. Declension 40 ff. 274 ff. Demonstratives, see Pronouns. Diminutives 242 f. Diptotes 274 ff. Distributive adjectives 228 t.
Dual 29. Elative 58
ff.
ff.
Nominative 279. Number 29 ff. 256 Numerals 210 ff. Nunation 7 f. Ordinals 225
ff.
Participles: Active 86 Pass. 90. Particles 90 ff. 290 ff.
Passive 89
f.
238.
ff.
Pause 333. Perfect 61 ff.
f.
Emphasis 283. Endearment 243.
Permutative 283 ff. Place and Time, nouns
Exception 315.
Pluperfect 68. Plural:
Feminine 25 ff. 251 ff. Foreign words 254, 258 Fractions 228. Future 73, 305. Genitive 41
f.
ff.
f.
ff.
Imperative 84 f. Imperfect see Indicative, Subjunctive, Jussive.
sound 30
259 ff. Poetry 332
f.
of,
240
broken 33
f.
ff.
ff.
Predicate 69. Prepositions 41 ff. 290 Prohibition 81, 85.
ff.
Pronouns: Demonstrative 53 f. Interrogative 54 f. Personal 31, 287 ff. Suffixed 49 f. 67 f. Pronunciation 4. Proper names 249, 250.
Index Reflexives 288. Relative adjectives 244 ff. 271. Relative sentences 202 ff.
Rhymed
prose 332.
Subjunctive 77 Syllables 14 f.
ff.
461
II.
Verbal nouns 87, 233 ff. Verbal sentences 64. Verbs 61 ff. Derived forms 94 ff. Doubled 122 ff. Doubly weak 184 ff. Hamzated 129 ff. Quadriliteral 193ff.
Unity, nouns
Weak
of, 27, 253.
148
Vowels 5
Printed by
C. F.
ff.
ff.
Winter, Darmstadt.
University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.
000 020 667
2